266
© 2008 Sony Corporation 3-875-769-15 (1) HD Visual Communication System Operating Instructions (Version 2.0) Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference. PCS-XG80/XG80S

HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    11

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

© 2008 Sony Corporation

3-875-769-15 (1)

HD Visual Communication System

Operating Instructions (Version 2.0)Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference.

PCS-XG80/XG80S

Page 2: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Owner’s Record

The model and the serial numbers are located at the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.

Model No. ______________Serial No. ______________

WARNING

To reduce a risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this product to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

IMPORTANTThe nameplate is located on the bottom.

NoticeThe PCS-XG80S and the PCS-XG80 are systems each of which contains Model No. PCS-XG80S as a main unit. Always refer to Model No. PCS-XG80S for regulatory compliance purpose.

WARNINGUse the AC power adapter provided with this equipment as a power supply source.

Manufacture Type No.Sony VGP-AC19V15

Any other power sources may result in hazards such as a fire.Disconnect device of this equipment is the mains plug of the AC adapter.The mains plug on this equipment must be used to disconnect mains power.Please ensure that the socket outlet is installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.In the event of abnormal operations, disconnect the mains plug.

NOTICEUse the power cord set approved by the appropriate testing organization for the specific countries where this unit is to be used.

NOTICEEach of PCS-XG80S, PCS-RF1 and PCSA-CXG80 contains an RF (Radio Frequency) transmitting and receiving module. Operation is subject to applicable local radio communication regulations in each country.This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

CAUTION for LAN portFor safety reasons, do not connect the LAN port to any network devices that might have excessive voltage.

Installing batteriesTwo R06 (size AA) batteries are supplied for Remote Commander.To avoid risk of explosion, use R06 (size AA) manganese or alkaline batteries.

CAUTIONDanger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

For the customers in the USA

WARNING

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2

Page 3: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement (PCS-XG80S/PCS-RF1): This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

If you dispose the unit, consult your nearest Sony Service Center. The built-in battery must be treated as a chemical waste.

For the customers in Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IC Interference Statement (PCS-XG80S/PCS-RF1)This device complies with RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

(PCS-XG80S)The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.IC:7424A-ZM100

IC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body.

For the customers in Europe

The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents.

(PCS-XG80S/PCS-RF1)This equipment conforms to R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please access the following URL:http://www.compliance.sony.de

For the customers in Europe, Australia and New Zealand

WARNINGThis is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.In the case that interference should occur, consult your nearest authorized Sony service facility.

This manual focuses on using ISDN lines to conduct a videoconference, but it also covers non-ISDN lines. If you use ISDN lines, consult your Sony dealer for more information.• The ISDN service may not be available

in some areas.

3

Page 4: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This apparatus shall not be used in the residential area.

For the customers in Taiwan only

For the customers in Europe (PCS-XG80S)

This product is intended to be used in the following countries:

AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HUIS IE IT LV LI LT LU MT NL NO PLPT RO SK SI ES SE CH GB BG

Language Informal DoC

Bulgarian

Czech

Danish

Undertegnede Sony Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.For yderligere information gå ind på følgende hjemmeside:http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Dutch

Hierbij verklaart Sony Corporation dat het toestel PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Nadere informatie kunt u vinden op: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

English

Hereby, Sony Corporation, declares that this PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please access the following URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Estonian

Sony Corporation kinnitab käesolevaga seadme PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System vastavust 1999/5/EÜ direktiivi põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele. Üksikasjalikum info: http://www.compliance.sony.de/.

С настоящето Сони Корпорация декларира, че този PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи клаузи на Директива 1999/5/EC. Подробности може да намерите на Интернет страницата : http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti lze získat na následující URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

4

Page 5: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Finnish

Sony Corporation vakuuttaa täten että PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Halutessasi lisätietoja, käy osoitteessa: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

French

Par la présente Sony Corporation déclare que l’appareil PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Pour toute information complémentaire, veuillez consulter l’URL suivante: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

German

Hiermit erklärt Sony Corporation, dass sich das Gerät PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Weitere Informationen erhältlich unter: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Greek

Hungarian

Italian

Con la presente Sony Corporation dichiara che questo PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Per ulteriori dettagli, si prega di consultare il seguente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Latvian

Lithuanian

Norwegian

Sony Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. For flere detaljer, vennligst se: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Polish

Niniejszym Sony Corporation oswiadcza, .e PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Szczególowe informacje znalezc mo.na pod nastepujacym adresem URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Language Informal DoC

Με την η Sony Corporation δηλώνει τι PCS-XG80S/HD Visual

και τις λ της 1999/5/EK. Για

http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Alulírott, Sony Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a(z) PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírá sainak. További információkat a következő weboldalon találhat: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Ar ðo Sony Corporation deklarç, ka PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System atbilst Direktîvas 1999/5/EK bûtiskajâm prasîbâm un citiem ar to saistîtajiem noteikumiem. Plaðâka inform âcija ir pieejama: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Ðiuo Sony Corporation deklaruoja, kad ðis PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Susipaþinti su visu atitikties deklaracijos turiniu Jûs galite interneto tinklalapyje: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

5

Page 6: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

For the customers in Europe (PCS-RF1)

This product is intended to be used in the following countries:

Portuguese

Sony Corporation declara que este PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System está conforme os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Para mais informacoes, por favor consulte a seguinte URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Romanian

Slovak

Slovenian

Spanish

Por medio de la presente Sony Corporation declara que el PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Para mayor información, por favor consulte el siguiente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Swedish

Härmed intygar Sony Corporation att denna PCS-XG80S/ HD Visual Communication System står I ö verensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. För ytterligare information gå in på följande hemsida: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HUIS IE IT LV LI LT LU MT NL NO PLPT RO SK SI ES SE CH GB BG

Language Informal DoC

Bulgarian

Czech

Language Informal DoC

Prin prezenta, Sony Corporation declară că acest PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System respectă cerinţele esenţiale si este în conformitate cu prevederile Directivei 1995/5/EC. Pentru detalii, vă rugăm accesaţi următoarea adresă: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System splňa základné po žiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti získate na nasledovnej webovej adrese: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation izjavlja, da je ta PCS-XG80S/HD Visual Communication System v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES. Za podrobnosti vas napro šamo, če pogledate na URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

С настоящето Сони Корпорация декларира, че този PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи клаузи на Директива 1999/5/EC. Подробности може да намерите на Интернет страницата : http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti lze získat na následující URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

6

Page 7: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Danish

Undertegnede Sony Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.For yderligere information gå ind på følgende hjemmeside:http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Dutch

Hierbij verklaart Sony Corporation dat het toestel PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Nadere informatie kunt u vinden op: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

English

Hereby, Sony Corporation, declares that this PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please access the following URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Estonian

Sony Corporation kinnitab käesolevaga seadme PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander vastavust 1999/5/EÜ direktiivi põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele. Üksikasjalikum info: http://www.compliance.sony.de/.

Finnish

Sony Corporation vakuuttaa täten että PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Halutessasi lisätietoja, käy osoitteessa: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

French

Par la présente Sony Corporation déclare que l’appareil PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Pour toute information complémentaire, veuillez consulter l’URL suivante: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

German

Hiermit erklärt Sony Corporation, dass sich das Gerät PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Weitere Informationen erhältlich unter: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Greek

Hungarian

Italian

Con la presente Sony Corporation dichiara che questo PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Per ulteriori dettagli, si prega di consultare il seguente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Latvian

Language Informal DoC

τις

http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Alulírott, Sony Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a(z) PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírá sainak. További információkat a következő weboldalon találhat: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Ar ðo Sony Corporation deklarç, ka PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander atbilst Direktîvas 1999/5/EK bûtiskajâm prasîbâm un citiem ar to saistîtajiem noteikumiem. Plaðâka inform âcija ir pieejama: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

7

Page 8: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Lithuanian

Norwegian

Sony Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. For flere detaljer, vennligst se: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Polish

Niniejszym Sony Corporation oswiadcza, .e PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Szczególowe informacje znalezc mo.na pod nastepujacym adresem URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Portuguese

Sony Corporation declara que este PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander está conforme os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Para mais informacoes, por favor consulte a seguinte URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Romanian

Slovak

Slovenian

Spanish

Por medio de la presente Sony Corporation declara que el PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Para mayor información, por favor consulte el siguiente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Swedish

Härmed intygar Sony Corporation att denna PCS-RF1/ RF Remote Commander står I ö verensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. För ytterligare information gå in på följande hemsida: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Language Informal DoC

Ðiuo Sony Corporation deklaruoja, kad ðis PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Susipaþinti su visu atitikties deklaracijos turiniu Jûs galite interneto tinklalapyje: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Prin prezenta, Sony Corporation declară că acest PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander respectă cerinţele esenţiale si este în conformitate cu prevederile Directivei 1995/5/EC. Pentru detalii, vă rugăm accesaţi următoarea adresă: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander splňa základné po žiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti získate na nasledovnej webovej adrese: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

Sony Corporation izjavlja, da je ta PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES. Za podrobnosti vas napro šamo, če pogledate na URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/

8

Page 9: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Precautions

Operating or storage locationAvoid operating or storing the system in the following locations:• Extremely hot or cold places• Humid or dusty places• Places exposed to strong vibration• Close to sources of strong magnetism• Close to sources of powerful

electromagnetic radiation, such as radios or TV transmitters

• Noisy places

CleaningUse a soft, dry cloth to gently wipe the cabinet and panel when cleaning the unit.For heavier cleaning, use a cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent to remove the dust, and finish by wiping again with a dry cloth. Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, or insecticides as they may damage the surface finishes.

Note on laser beamsLaser beams may damage a CMOS image sensor. You are cautioned that the surface of a CMOS image sensor should not be exposed to laser beam radiation in an environment where a laser beam device is used.

9

Page 10: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Using This Manual ................................................................................................. 16Features .................................................................................................................. 17System Components .............................................................................................. 19

Basic System Components ............................................................................... 19Optional Equipment ......................................................................................... 21

System Configuration ............................................................................................ 23System Configuration via a LAN ..................................................................... 23System Configuration via an ISDN .................................................................. 24System Configuration via a SIP ....................................................................... 25System Configuration Using Two LAN Connections ..................................... 26System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint ............................................. 27System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint ......................................... 28System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint ........................... 29System Configuration Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones ............................... 30

System Connections ............................................................................................... 31System Connection via a LAN ......................................................................... 32System Connection via an ISDN ...................................................................... 33System Connection via a SIP ........................................................................... 34Attaching the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit to a Tripod ............................ 35

Preparing the System ............................................................................................. 36Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander ............................................. 36Programming the Remote Commander to Operate the Camera Unit .............. 37

Turning the System On/Off ................................................................................... 40Turning On ....................................................................................................... 40Standby Mode Function ................................................................................... 41Setting the HD Visual Communication System to Standby Mode .................. 42Turning Off ...................................................................................................... 42Adjusting the Volume on the TV Monitor ....................................................... 43

Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard .................................................................................................................... 44Using the Menus .................................................................................................... 47

Identifying the Home Menu ............................................................................. 47Operation Using the Menu ............................................................................... 54Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander ....................................... 57Entering Characters Using the On-Screen Keyboard ....................................... 58

10

Page 11: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Registering Local Information ............................................................................... 60Opening the Setup Menu .................................................................................. 60Line Interface Setup Menu ............................................................................... 64Dial Setup Menu ............................................................................................... 64Answer Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 65Multipoint Setup Menu .................................................................................... 65Communication Setup Menu ............................................................................ 66Audio Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 69Video Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 72LAN Setup Menu ............................................................................................. 74QoS Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 76TOS Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 77SIP Setup Menu ................................................................................................ 78ISDN Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 79SPID Settings for Customers in the USA and Canada ..................................... 79Annotation Setup Menu .................................................................................... 80Camera Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 81General Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 81Home Menu Setup Menu ................................................................................. 83Administrator Setup Menu ............................................................................... 85Encryption Setup Menu .................................................................................... 89Shared Phone Book Setup Menu ...................................................................... 90

Displaying the Machine Status .............................................................................. 91Displaying the Machine Status Menu .............................................................. 91Machine Information ........................................................................................ 93Peripheral Status ............................................................................................... 93Communication Mode Status ........................................................................... 94LAN Line Status ............................................................................................... 94Network Routing Check ................................................................................... 95

Restrictions on the Use of LAN2 ........................................................................... 95Restrictions on the Use of IPv6 .............................................................................. 96Setting Up the Network Configurations ................................................................. 97

LAN Connection via DHCP (LAN1/LAN2) .................................................... 97LAN Connection through a Router (LAN1/LAN2) ......................................... 98LAN Connection through a Gatekeeper (LAN1 Only) .................................... 99LAN Connection through NAT (LAN1 Only) ............................................... 100LAN Connection with H.460 Firewall Traversal (LAN1 Only) .................... 101LAN Connection Using PPPoE (LAN1/LAN2) ............................................ 103ISDN Connections .......................................................................................... 104

About the Network Routing Check ...................................................................... 105

11

Page 12: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: Basic Connection

Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party ............................................... 106Turning On the Power .................................................................................... 106Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu .................................... 107Calling a Remote Party by Entering Their Address or Number Directly (Direct

Dial) .................................................................................................... 108Calling a Remote Party Using the One-Touch Dial Buttons ......................... 110Calling a Remote Party by Selecting Them in the History List ..................... 111Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book .................................. 112Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book ........................... 114

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party ................................................................ 117Answering a Call from a Remote Party ......................................................... 117

Ending the Connection ......................................................................................... 119Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book .......................................................... 120

Registering a New Remote Party ................................................................... 120Editing the Contents of the Phone Book ........................................................ 123Copying a Registered Party in the Phone Book ............................................. 124Deleting the Registered Remote Party ........................................................... 124Creating a Group in the Phone Book (Group Edit) ........................................ 124Creating a Private Phone Book ...................................................................... 126Using the Shared Phone Book ........................................................................ 128

Adjusting the Sound ............................................................................................. 131Adjusting the Volume of the Received Sound ............................................... 131Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function .............................. 131Turning Off the Sound on Answering – Mic on Answer Function ................ 132Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function .................................. 132Reducing Echo – Echo Canceller ................................................................... 132

Adjusting the Camera .......................................................................................... 134Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom ......................................................... 134Adjusting the Brightness ................................................................................ 135Using the Preset Function .............................................................................. 137Adjusting the Camera in the Detailed Setup Menu ........................................ 140

Selecting the Input Picture and Sound ................................................................. 142Switching the Displayed Picture between the Local and Remote Pictures .... 142Selecting the Input Picture ............................................................................. 142Selecting the Video Input Using the F1 to F4 (Function) Buttons on the Remote

Commander ......................................................................................... 143Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party .................................... 143Switching Video and Audio at the Same Time .............................................. 143Switching the Picture from the Remote System ............................................ 143

Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen ..................................... 145Capturing the Screen ............................................................................................ 147

12

Page 13: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment

Using a Tools Menu ............................................................................................. 149Using the Computer Picture for Presentation ...................................................... 152

Installing the HD Data Solution Software ...................................................... 152Connecting a Computer .................................................................................. 153Making a Presentation .................................................................................... 153

Streaming a Communication ................................................................................ 155Recording a Visual Communication .................................................................... 157Using the Annotation Function ............................................................................ 159

Connecting a Pen Tablet ................................................................................. 159Using the Annotation Function while in Communication ............................. 159

Using Multiple Microphones ............................................................................... 164Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones ....................................................................... 167Using a Second Camera ....................................................................................... 170Recording during a Communication .................................................................... 171Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party ............. 172Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector ........................ 174Communicating without the Picture – Voice Meeting ......................................... 176Controlling the Remote System with the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission ... 177Accessing the Communication System ................................................................ 178

Using a Web Browser ..................................................................................... 178Using Telnet ................................................................................................... 178

Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection

Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN ................................................ 180Starting an Encrypted Connection ....................................................................... 182

Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection

Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection .............................................. 185Using the LAN Connection (Up to Six Points) .............................................. 185Using the Cascade Connection via LAN (Up to 10 Points) ........................... 186Using the ISDN Connection ........................................................................... 187Using Both LAN and ISDN ........................................................................... 188Using the LAN Cascade and ISDN Connection ............................................ 189

Installing the MCU Software ............................................................................... 190Confirming that the Installation of the Software is Complete ........................ 190

Configuring Multipoint ........................................................................................ 191Setting Up Multipoint ..................................................................................... 191

13

Page 14: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List ............... 191Starting a Multipoint Connection ........................................................................ 195

Calling Remote Parties ................................................................................... 195Receiving a Call from a Remote Party ........................................................... 199

Using the Display Control ................................................................................... 200Broadcast Mode ............................................................................................. 200Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows .................................................... 202Switching the Broadcast Mode ...................................................................... 204Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Another Terminal ........................ 205

Ending the Multipoint Connection ...................................................................... 206Notes on Secondary Terminals ............................................................................ 207Multipoint Attributes ........................................................................................... 208

Chapter 7: Web Control Function

Opening the Web Page ........................................................................................ 211Identifying a User ................................................................................................ 212Selecting a Menu ................................................................................................. 214How to Use [Home] Menu ................................................................................... 215How to Use [Download] Menu ............................................................................ 216How to Use [Remote Commander] Menu ........................................................... 217Selecting a Tool ................................................................................................... 218How to Use [Version Up] Page ........................................................................... 219How to Use [Streaming] Page ............................................................................. 220How to Use [Monitor] Page ................................................................................. 221

Appendix

Location and Function of Parts and Controls ...................................................... 222PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System .......................................... 222PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit (Supplied with PCS-XG80) ...................... 224PCS-RF1 RF Remote Commander (Supplied) .............................................. 225PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional) ............................................................. 226PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional) ............................................................. 227

Indicators ............................................................................................................. 228On-Screen Messages ............................................................................................ 231Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 233Specifications ....................................................................................................... 237

PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System ............................... 237PCS-RF1 Remote Commander (Supplied with PCS-XG80/XG80S) ............ 238VGP-AC19V15 AC Adaptor (Supplied with PCS-XG80/XG80S) ............... 238

14

Page 15: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit (Supplied with PCS-XG80) ....................... 239PCS-A1 Microphone (Supplied with PCS-XG80) ......................................... 239PCSA-A3 Microphone (Optional) .................................................................. 239PCSA-A7P4 Microphone (Optional) ............................................................. 239PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 240PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 240PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution Software (Optional) .................................. 240PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU Software (Optional) .............................................. 240Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals .......................................................... 242Acceptable VIDEO IN (YPbPr) Signals ........................................................ 242Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 243Pin Assignments on Optional Board Connectors ........................................... 245List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-XG80/XG80S .................................. 246

Meeting Room Layout ......................................................................................... 247“Memory Stick” Media ........................................................................................ 248Phenomena Specific to CMOS Image Sensors .................................................... 249Glossary ............................................................................................................... 250Menu Configuration ............................................................................................. 253

“IPELA” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

15

Page 16: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Using This Manual

The chapters cover the following contents; please read the chapters that may be required for your type of communication.

Chapter 1: Installation and PreparationThis chapter guides you through the system configuration and information required to use your HD Visual Communication System for the first time. It shows you how to install and connect your Communication System, to turn the system on/off and how to access basic on-screen menus.

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System AdministratorThis chapter describes how to register and set up all the necessary items for system administrators, using the on-screen menus.

Chapter 3: Basic ConnectionThis chapter guides you through the basic operations and settings for connecting to a remote party. You will learn how to start connection to finish it. It is recommended that this chapter be read by participants in a communication.

Chapter 4: Connection With Optional EquipmentThis chapter shows advanced communication using the optional equipment, and functions such as streaming, recording, presentation and annotation.

Chapter 5: Encrypted ConnectionThis chapter shows how to connect to a remote party using an encrypted video and

audio data, and encrypted data from a computer.

Chapter 6: Multipoint ConnectionThis chapter shows you how to connect your system to multiple sites. Multipoint connection requires installation of the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in your Visual Communication System.

Chapter 7: Web Control FunctionThis chapter shows you how to control the PCS-XG80/XG80S or set it up via a Web browser.

AppendixThe appendix contains descriptions of the controls and connectors on the components of the HD Visual Communication System, troubleshooting list, specifications, and a glossary.

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

16 Using This Manual

Page 17: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

Features

The PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System is a communication system that provides face-to-face communications with a remote party by transmitting and receiving images and sound via LAN (Local Area Network) or ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) connections.

Supports ITU-T international standardThe HD Visual Communication System complies with ITU-T Recommendations defined by WTSC for easy connection with remote parties overseas.ITU: International Telecommunication UnionWTSC: World Telecommunications Standardization Committee

Transmission and reception of high-definition images enabledThe Communication System supports the H.264 high-definition video compression format, enabling transmission and reception of interlaced video signals with a high resolution of 1920 × 1080 or 1280 × 720 by a maximum of 60 frames per second.

Transmission and reception of wide range of stereo sound capabilityThe audio compression format of the Communication System supports MPEG4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) stereo sound and 22 kHz monaural sound, allowing high-quality audio transmission and reception. The built-in echo canceller supports up to 16 kHz.

Supports data communicationInstalling the optional PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution Software into the Communication System enables transmission of output data from a computer.

High transmission speeds and high-quality picture capabilityThe Communication System accepts a LAN communication bit rate of up to 10 Mbps. It also allows you to connect to as many as three ISDN lines and use 6B channels with the optional PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit, and as many as six ISDN lines and use 12B channels with the optional PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

Wide range of video/audio compression format selectableThe Communication System supports the H.264, H.263+, H.261 and MPEG4* video compression formats. It also supports the MPEG4 AAC**, G.722, G.728, and G.711 audio compression formats.

* Supports MPEG4 only for connection using SIP.

** Supports MPEG4 AAC only for IP and ISDN connection.

Annotation capabilityThe annotation function allows you to write letters or graphics on the screen or point with a pointer during communication using the optional pen tablet.

BrightFace feature incorporated in the HD Camera UnitThe supplied PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit incorporates the BrightFace feature, allowing detection of dark and bright shooting parts of a scene individually to make a dark scene brighter and a bright scene clearer.

Up to 100 preset camera settingsUp to 100 settings for camera angle and zoom can be registered in the preset memory of the System. You can easily switch the shooting area only by recalling the preset position.

17Features

Page 18: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

RF (Radio Frequency) Remote Commander adoptedThe supplied Remote Commander controls the Communication System using the radio frequency of 2.4 GHz. The Remote Commander can be programmed for pairing with the System or the Camera Unit to prevent interference from other Systems and Camera Units.

On-screen keyboardThe on-screen keyboard displayed on the monitor screen allows you to input a number, address, etc. without moving your eyes away from the screen.

QoS (Quality of Service) function for optimization of bandwidth and traffic packet through networkThe Communication System includes the “Packet Resend Request”, “Adaptive Rate Control”, and “Forward Error Correction” functions. Depending on the network status, these functions are used in Hybrid to guarantee consistent, high-quality communications.

Compact sizeThe compact size of the Communication System allows versatile installation layout.

Echo cancelling microphoneUp to 40 PCSA-A7 echo cancelling microphones (optional) can be connected to one port without losing sound quality, using a cascade connection.

Equipped with an HDMI connector The HDMI connector allows you to connect an HDMI display unit to the Communication System easily.

Equipped with a Memory Stick slotThe Communication System is equipped with a Memory Stick slot, allowing you to save still images, create the Private Phone Book and store the customized settings in a “Memory Stick”.

Video and audio recordingVideo and audio can be recorded in a “Memory Stick” and can be watched on a computer after.

StreamingYou can broadcast streaming video and audio. This allows people who cannot attend the communication to watch the proceedings over the Web using a computer. You can also select whether to broadcast both video and audio or audio only.

Supports a connection using SIPThe Communication System allows connection to a remote party with an IP phone, etc. using SIP (Session Initiation Protocol).

Supports encrypted connectionThe system allows you to make a strictly confidential connection using standard encryption, which complies with the H.233, H.234 and H.235 standerdized by the ITU-T.

Supports multipoint connectionInstalling the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in your Visual Communication System allows connection among multiple points via a LAN or/and ISDN line.

18 Features

Page 19: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

System ComponentsThe PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System is composed of basic system components for a basic communication, and optional equipment for an enhanced communication.

This manual explains how to operate the system using the PCS-XG80 HD Visual Communication System Package that contains the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit and two PCS-A1 microphones, and the PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System without the Camera Unit and microphones.

Components packaged in the PCS-XG80

Basic System Components

Note

Unit DescriptionPCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

Contains the video codec, audio codec, echo canceller, network interfaces and system controller.

PCS-RF1Remote Commander

Used to control the HD Visual Communication System. Before using, pairing with the Communication System or HD Camera Unit is required.

VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor Supplies power to the Communication System.

PCSA-CXG80HD Camera Unit

Camera to shoot high-definition images.

F1F2

F3F4

T

W

/

19System Components

Page 20: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Components packaged in the PCS-XG80S

PCS-A1 Microphone Omni-directional microphone that picks up sound relatively from all directions, allowing participants to speak from any location. It is recommended to use in a quiet situation (two pieces supplied).

Unit DescriptionPCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

Contains the video codec, audio codec, echo canceller, network interfaces and system controller.

PCS-RF1Remote Commander

Used to control the HD Visual Communication System. Before using, pairing with the Communication System or HD Camera Unit is required.

VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor Supplies power to the Communication System.

Unit Description

F1F2

F3F4

T

W

/

20 System Components

Page 21: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

TV monitor

A TV or projector, etc. is required to monitor the images for the system.

Optional equipment especially designed for use with the PCS-XG80/XG80SThe following optional devices are used to enhance your videoconference.

Optional Equipment

Unit Description

TV, Projector, etc. Used as a monitor and speakers.When the TV monitor is connected to the HDMI connector on the Communication System, you can view the high-definition images.

Unit Description

PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to three ISDN lines; 6B channels usable.

PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to six ISDN lines; 12B channels usable.

PCSA-A3 microphone Unidirectional microphone. It is recommended when you want to pick up the voice of a speaker directed toward the microphone.

PCSA-A7 microphone Directional microphones that feature high sound quality and a built-in monaural echo canceller. (Commercially available microphones are 4-piece set.) Several PCSA-A7 Microphones can be connected in cascade without reduceing sound quality. Recommended when many microphones are required.

PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution Software

Software required for transmission of video and computer pictures at the same time by connecting a computer.

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU Software

Software required for multipoint connection using LAN or/and ISDN.

21System Components

Page 22: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

CableUse the following cable to connect a device in this system.

HDMI cable

Cable Part No. Number

HDMI cable (3 m (9.8 ft)) 1-835-440-1x 1

22 System Components

Page 23: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

System ConfigurationThe PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System has various system configuration capabilities using the basic components and optional equipment. This section describes the capabilities and necessary equipment for some typical configuration examples.

This allows you to:• Have a point-to-point HD visual communication over LAN.• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.

System configuration

System Configuration via a LAN

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones

23System Configuration

Page 24: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Connection to ISDN is required to use the PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system.

This allows you to:• Have a point-to-point HD visual communication over ISDN.• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.• Hold an HD visual communication with high speeds and highest quality

image transmission by connecting up to three ISDN lines (when using the PCSA-B384S) or by connecting up to six ISDN lines (when using the PCSA-B768S).

System configuration

About the number of ISDN lines and B (bearer) channelsUp to three ISDN lines (6B channels) with the PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit or up to six ISDN lines (12B channels) with the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit can be connected to one PCS-XG80/XG80S. The more channels you use for a single communication, the faster speeds and higher-quality picture you can obtain for your network communication.

When connecting to the ISDN Unit, Use the ports in ascending order.Yes: 1, 2, 3…No: 1, 6, 5…

System Configuration via an ISDN

Note

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

RF

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S

ISDN Unit (not supplied)6 PCS-A1 Microphones

This diagram depicts a system configuration using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

24 System Configuration

Page 25: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

This allows you to:• Have an HD visual communication with an IP telephone, etc. using SIP.• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.

System configuration

Use the 1 (LAN1) connector on the Communication System when connecting your system via a SIP. Connection to a SIP server through the 2 (LAN2) connector is not available.

System Configuration via a SIP

Note

/

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones6 SIP server7 IP telephone, etc.

1

25System Configuration

Page 26: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This allows you to:Connect your system to two networks using the 1 (LAN1) and 2 (LAN2) connectors. You can use the 1 connector to connect a private network in your company and 2 connector to connect to an intranet outside your company.

If your system is connected to a LAN using the 2 connector, some of the intranet/internet functions of your system, such as SIP server connection, gatekeeper connection, Telnet access, and Web access, are not available. If your system is connected to one LAN, use the 1 connector.

For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of LAN2” on page 95.

System configuration

System Configuration Using Two LAN Connections

Note

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones

Internet

1

2

26 System Configuration

Page 27: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

You need to install the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software.

This allows you to:Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to 10 sites over LAN.

System configuration

System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint

/ /

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones6 PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software (not supplied)

27System Configuration

Page 28: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

You need to connect the optional PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system and to install the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software.

This allows you to:Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to six sites over ISDN.

System configuration

System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint

/

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones6 PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software (not supplied)7 PCSA-B384S (not supplied) or PCSA-B768S (not supplied) ISDN Unit

This diagram depicts a system configuration using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

28 System Configuration

Page 29: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

Installing the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in two HD Visual Communication Systems enables you to connect to multiple sites up to 10 via mixed LAN and ISDN lines.

This allows you to:Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to 10 sites over LAN and ISDN.

Be sure to connect two Communication Systems with the HD MCU software installed over LAN.

System configuration

System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint

Note

/

POWER/STANDBY

T

W

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCS-A1 Microphones6 PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software (not supplied)7 PCSA-B384S (not supplied) or PCSA-B768S (not supplied) ISDN Unit

This diagram depicts a system configuration using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

29System Configuration

Page 30: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This allows you to:• Connect up to 40 PCSA-A7 microphones to one microphone connector,

using a cascade connection. As the PCSA-A7 microphones feature high sound quality and can be connected in cascade without reducing sound quality, they are available to an HD visual communication with a large number of participants.

• Connect additional microphones during communication.

System configuration

• Position the microphones about 50 cm (1.6 ft) away from the participants.• When using speakers, do not place them in front of the microphones.• The PCSA-A7 microphone is monaural and cannot pick up sound in stereo.

For information about PCSA-A7 microphones, see “Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones” on page 167.

System Configuration Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones

Notes

/

/

POWER/STANDBY

POWER/STANDBY

PCS-RF1RF

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

/

1 PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System2 PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit3 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander4 TV monitor (not supplied)5 PCSA-A7 microphone (PCSA-A7P4: 4-piece set × 2,

not supplied)

30 System Configuration

Page 31: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

System ConnectionsThis section describes the typical system connections.

• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable, interface cable, or pen tablet with the power

on. Doing so may damage the Camera Unit, Communication System or ISDN Unit.• For safety, do not connect the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector to a network that

applies excess voltage via the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector.• Used with the Camera Unit or ISDN Unit for the first time, the Communication

System may automatically upgrade the software of the connected equipment. Upgrade the software according to the message displayed on the monitor screen. Be sure not to turn off the Communication System or disconnect the cable during upgrading. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction of the system.

Notes

31System Connections

Page 32: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

• Normally, connect the UTP cable to the 1 (LAN1) connector (indicated in green). If the UTP cable is connected to the 2 (LAN2) connector, some of the functions of your system may be restricted.

For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of LAN2” on page 95.

• The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not used during regular communication.

System Connection via a LAN

Notes

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

TERMINALVISCA OUT

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit

to TERMINAL

PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

Camera cable (supplied with the Camera Unit)

Power cord*

to CAMERA

to LAN

TV monitor**

to a wall outlet

to DC19.5V

VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor*

to a wall outlet

* supplied** not supplied

UTP cable (category 5, straight)**

PCS-A1 microphone

to MIC (A1/A3)

to 1to

HDMIOUT

HDMIcable*

toHDMI

IN

32 System Connections

Page 33: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not used during regular conferences.

System Connection via an ISDN

Note

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

TERMINALVISCA OUT

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit

to TERMINAL

Camera cable(supplied with

the CameraUnit)

Power cord*

toCAMERA

TV monitor**

to a wall outlet

* supplied** not supplied

Interface cable (supplied with ISDN Unit)

to ISDN UNIT

to TERMINALPCSA-B384S ISDN Unit**

to ISDN 1-6

ISDN Unit**

to ISDN 1-3

ISDN modular cable**

PCSA-B768SISDN Unit**

VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor*

to a wall outlet

to DC19.5V

to ISDN

PCS-A1 Microphone

to MIC (A1/A3)

toHDMIOUT

HDMIcable*

toHDMI

IN

33System Connections

Page 34: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

• Normally, connect the UTP cable to the 1 (LAN1) connector (indicated in green). If the UTP cable is connected to the 2 (LAN2) connector, some of the functions of your system may be restricted.

For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of LAN2” on page 95.

• The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not used during regular communication.

System Connection via a SIP

Notes

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

TERMINALVISCA OUT

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit

Camera cable (supplied withthe Camera Unit)

Power cord*

toCAMERA

TV monitor**

to a wall outlet

* supplied** not supplied

to TERMINALSIP server

UTP cable (category 5, straight)**

VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor*

to a wall outlet

to DC19.5V

PCS-A1 microphone

to MIC (A1/A3)

to 1

to LANconnector

to LANconnector

to LAN connector

IP telephone, etc.

toHDMIOUT

HDMIcable*

toHDMI

IN

34 System Connections

Page 35: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

To attach the Camera Unit to a tripod

Attach a tripod to the screw hole used for attaching a tripod on the bottom of the Camera Unit.The tripod must be set up on a flat surface and tightened firmly by hand.Use a tripod with screws of the following specifications.

4 = 4.5 – 6 mm4 = 0.18 – 0.24 inches

Attaching the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit to a Tripod

35System Connections

Page 36: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Preparing the System

Most of the operations with the HD Visual Communication System can be controlled with the supplied Remote Commander.

1 Remove the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert two size AA (R6) batteries (supplied) with correct polarities into the battery compartment.

3 Replace the cover.

Be sure to insert the batteries E side first. Inserting them forcibly e side first may damage the insulated film covering the batteries and cause a short circuit.

Battery lifeWhen the batteries are exhausted, the LED indicator does not light if you press any button and the Remote Commander does not function properly. Replace both batteries with new ones.

Notes on batteriesTo avoid damage from possible battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:• Make sure to insert the batteries with the polarities in the correct direction.• Do not mix old and new batteries, or different types of batteries.• Do not attempt to charge the batteries.• If you do not intend to use the Remote Commander for a long period of time,

remove the batteries.

Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander

Note

36 Preparing the System

Page 37: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

• If battery leakage occurs, clean the battery compartment and replace all the

batteries with new ones.

The supplied Remote Commander controls the HD Visual Communication System using the radio frequency of 2.4 GHz. The Remote Commander and the Communication System are paired to prevent interference from other Remote Commanders and Systems.Pairing between the Remote Commander and the Communication System is programmed at the factory. If the Communication System is installed in shielded locations, such as under a desk or in a rack, it may not be controlled by the Remote Commander, depending on the conditions of radio-wave reception. In this case, pair the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit with the Remote Commander.

When performing pairing procedure, be sure to turn off other HD Visual Communication Systems or HD Camera Units located nearby that are not targets for pairing. If multiple devices are turned on, the Remote Commander might pair device other than the target one.

To pair the Camera Unit with the Remote Commander

1 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.

The ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System flashes. The indicator lights in green when the Communication System turns on.

2 Set “RF Remote Control Reception” to “Camera” in the General setup menu.

Programming the Remote Commander to Operate the Camera Unit

Note

/

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

/

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ABC DEF

PRESENTATION

LAYOUT

RETURN

CONNECT

ON/OFF

MIC

BACKSPACE DISCONNECT

TONE DOT

TOOLS

VOLUME ZOOM

VIDEO INPUT CAMERA

ENTER

OPEN

/

POWER/STANDBY

1

?/1 (power) indicator

LED indicator

43

37Preparing the System

Page 38: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

For details, see “RF Remote Control Reception” on the Device Setup page of the General setup menu on page 81.

For the procedure on how to operate the menus, see “Opening the Setup Menu” on page 60.

3 Within three minutes after the power of the Communication System is turned on, locate the Remote Commander closer to the RF receiver at the rear of the Camera Unit, and press the RETURN and TOOLS buttons at the same time.

The Remote Commander and the Camera Unit enter pairing mode, and the LED indicator on the Remote Commander flashes rapidly.

4 Press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

If the LED indicator on the Remote Commander flashes more slowly, pairing the units has succeeded.

The pairing between the Communication System and the Remote Commander is disabled.

When pairing has failedThe LED indicator on the Remote Commander continues flashing rapidly. In this case, press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander again.

To cancel pairingPress the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System.

• When the LED indicator does not flash even if you press any button on the Remote Commander, the batteries might be exhausted. Replace both batteries with new ones.

• Once pairing is established between the units, it will not be erased even if the batteries are replaced.

• Operable distance is 10 m (32.8 ft.). Depending on the circumstances, a longer operable distance may be possible.

Notes

Camera LED Brightness

RF Remote Control Reception Camera

CancelSave

Dark

Dark

15minutes

General1

Setup

Terminal Name

Standby Mode

On

Off

On

Standby Time

Last Number Registration

Control by Far End

Language English

System LED Brightness

Device SetupGeneral

38 Preparing the System

Page 39: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

To pair the Communication System with the Remote Commander again

Follow the procedure below to release the paring with the Camera Unit, and to perform pairing with the System again.

1 Turn on the Communication System.

2 Set “RF Remote Control Reception” to “System” on the Device Setup page of the General setup menu (page 81).

3 Within three minutes after the power is on, locate the Remote Commander closer to the Communication System, and press the RETURN and TOOLS buttons at the same time.

The LED indicator flashes rapidly.

4 Press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

If the LED indicator flashes more slowly, pairing between the units has succeeded.

39Preparing the System

Page 40: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Turning the System On/OffThis section describes how to turn on or off the Communication System.

1 Turn on the TV monitor.

2 Turn on the power of any other equipment to be used for this connection.

3 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.

The ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System flashes. The indicator lights in green when the Communication System turns on.

The Home menu will appear on the monitor screen and the picture shot by the local camera will also appear in the Home menu.

Home menu

For details on the Home menu, see “Identifying the Home Menu” on page 47.

Turning On

/

POWER/STANDBY

?/1 (power) switch

?/1 (power) indicator

Connect

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Home

AAA Ready to connect.Ready

40 Turning the System On/Off

Page 41: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

• After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be careful not to catch your finger.

• If you use force to prevent the camera from moving, the camera may stop moving and the picture may not be displayed. In this case, turn off the System, and turn it on again.

• When you turn on the power of the Communication System for the first time after installation, the setup wizard will appear after the self-diagnosis is completed. Set up your system following the wizard.

For setups using the wizard, see “Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard” on page 44.

• Used with an optional device especially designed for use with this system, such as the Camera Unit and ISDN Unit, for the first time, the Communication System may automatically upgrade the software of the connected device. Upgrade the software according to the message displayed on the monitor screen. Be sure not to turn off the Communication System or disconnect the cable during upgrading. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction of the system. System malfunction may also occur when a system power-off has been caused by an accidental problem such as a power interruption during upgrading. If connection of the Camera Unit, ISDN Unit, etc. to the Communication System is not re-established even after the system power is recovered, consult a Sony dealer.

• You can check the versions of the Communication System, optional dedicated equipment connected and the application software installed using the Machine Status menu.

For details on the Machine Status menu, see page 91.

To save power, the Communication System will enter standby mode if you do not operate it for a specified period of time. When the Communication System is in standby mode, the ?/1 indicator lights in orange. You can turn on the Communication System with any button on the Remote Commander if the System is in standby mode.Once the Communication System receives a call, the standby mode is automatically released.

Notes

Standby Mode Function

41Turning the System On/Off

Page 42: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

1 Display the Home menu on the monitor screen, then press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.

The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.

2 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select OK, then press the ENTER button.

You may press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.

The Communication System enters standby mode and the @/1 indicator on the Communication System lights in orange.

To cancel setting the system to standbySelect “Cancel” with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press the ENTER button in step 2 above.

To release the standby modePress any button on the Remote Commander.

To specify the standby timeSpecify the time that you want the system to remain on before entering into standby mode (1 to 99 minutes) by setting “Standby Time” of the Device Setup page of the General setup menu. If you do not want the system to enter the standby mode, set “Standby Mode” to “Off”.

For the settings, see “Standby Time” and “Standby Mode” in the General setup menu on page 81.

1 Press the @/1 (power) switch on the Communication System.

The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.

2 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Power off”, and press the ENTER button.

You can power off the system by pressing the @/1 (power) button on the Remote Commander.

The system turns off.

3 Turn off the power of other equipment used for the communication.

• Turn off the power switch on the Communication System when the system will not be used for an extended period. While the power switch is off, you cannot receive a call from a remote party.

Setting the HD Visual Communication System to Standby Mode

Turning Off

Notes

42 Turning the System On/Off

Page 43: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

• Be sure to unplug the power cord after the power of the system is turned off

completely.• If the system is unplugged for about 10 days or longer, the clock setting of the system

may be reset. In this case, re-set the date and time in the Clock Set page of the General setup menu.

The procedure for volume adjustment during system setup differs from the procedure during communication.Adjust the volume on the TV monitor during system setup, and adjust the volume on the Communication System while in communication.

Volume adjustment during setup

Before adjusting the volume on the TV monitor, set the volume on the Communication System to the appropriate position.

1 Press the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander to set the volume level on the adjustment bar displayed on the screen to the middle position.

2 Adjust the volume on the TV monitor so that you can properly hear a remote party’s speaking.

Do not activate the TV’s surround sound feature as it may cause the echo canceller of the Communication System not to function properly and make strange sounds.

Volume adjustment during communication

Press the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander to adjust the volume on the Communication System during communication.

Adjusting the Volume on the TV Monitor

Note

11

43Turning the System On/Off

Page 44: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard

When you turn on the Communication System for the first time after installation and the self-diagnosis is completed, the setup wizard appears on the monitor screen. Register your local system data with the setup wizard using the Remote Commander.

• You can change the settings made with the setup wizard later using the setup menus.• The setup wizard will also be displayed when you install the PCSA-B384S or PCSA-

B768S ISDN Unit to your system later. Perform the setup again.

To select the on-screen language

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Select Language” in the setup wizard, then press the ENTER button.

Notes

Back to Tools

English

2007.11.29 14:21

IP

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Wizard

5/11/2008 13:00IP:192.168.0.11

Home Select Language

Set Region and Clock

Select Line I/F

Set up LAN

Set up ISDN

Set up SIP

Wizard Select Language

5/11/2008 13:00IP:192.168.0.11

Select the on-screen language.

English

CancelSave

Select Language

44 Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard

Page 45: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the

language to be used for the on-screen menus and messages.

Select from among English, French, German, Japanese, Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic, Thai, Turkish, Norwegian, Welsh, Czech and Hungarian.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.

The setup wizard is restored.

To set the region and clock

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Set Region and Clock” in the setup wizard, then press the ENTER button.

2 Set the region and clock items.

Select the region: Select the country or region where the system is used.Select the display pattern: Select the display pattern of year, month and

day.Enter the year, Enter the month, Enter the day, Enter the time: Enter

the date and time using the number buttons on the Remote Commander.

For the procedure to enter the numbers using the Remote Commander, see “Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander” on page 57.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.

The setup wizard is restored.

To select the line interface

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Select Line I/F” in the seup wizard, then press the ENTER button.

Set Region and Clock

Wizard

Select the display pattern

Select the region

Enter the year

Enter the month

Enter the day

Enter the time

CancelSave

Year/Month/Day

Set Region and Clock

45Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard

Page 46: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

2 Select the line interface to be used.

Which is your Line I/F?: Select from among IP, ISDN and SIP.Which is your primary Line I/F?: If you select two or more interfaces

with “Which is your Line I/F?”, select the interface you most use. Select from among IP, ISDN and SIP.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.

The setup wizard appears.

To set up a LAN connection

Select “Set up LAN” in the setup wizard, then set up a LAN connection.

To set up an ISDN line

Select “Set up ISDN” in the setup wizard, then set up an ISDN line connection.

To set up a SIP

Select “Set up SIP” in the setup wizard, then set up a SIP connection.

Select Line I/F

Wizard

Which is your Line I/F? (Multiple selection available)

IP

Which is your primary Line I/F?

ISDN SIP

IP ISDN SIP

CancelSave

Select Line I/F

46 Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard

Page 47: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

Using the MenusThe HD Visual Communication System uses the on-screen menus to make various adjustments and settings. This section explains how to adjust or set the items in the menus and gives a brief introduction to the menus.

The Home menu is displayed on the monitor screen when the system isturned on and has not been connected to a remote party. The Home menu displays the image shot by the local camera, local system name, current date and time and buttons to open the menus.You can select the items shown in the Home menu using the Home Menu1 to Home Menu3 pages in the Home Menu setup menu.The descriptions of the items displayed in the Home menu are given below using the default menu and the menu with all items shown, as the examples.

Home menu (default)

Identifying the Home Menu

DialIPConnect

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXIP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Home

AAA Ready

1

8

qs

qf

23 4 6 7

47Using the Menus

Page 48: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Home menu (with all items shown)

1 IPELA logo

B Background screenImage shot by the camera is displayed.

C Local terminal nameThe local terminal name set in the menu is displayed.

D IP address of the local systemThe IP address of the local system is shown. By changing the “Number Display” setting (page 83) on the Home Menu1 page of the Home Menu setup menu, you can display the gatekeeper’s user name and user number, NAT address, etc. instead of the IP address.

E ISDN line numberThe ISDN line number of the local system is shown.

F Local system statusThe status on the local terminal is shown.

G Date and timeThe current date and clock are displayed.

H Camera buttonThe Camera menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The Camera menu is used to adjust the camera angle or brightness, or to preset the camera adjustments and to move the camera to the preset position.

Detailed Dial

Camera

Tools

History

Phone Book

DialIP

Office EOffice ARoom 201

F2

Room 101

F1 F3 F4

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXAAA Ready

Home NEAR

1

89

0qa

qd

3 5 6 74

qf qg qh qj qk

ql

2

48 Using the Menus

Page 49: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

Camera menu

For details on the Camera menu, see page 134.

I Tools buttonThe Tools menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The menu is used to carry out presentation, streaming, recording, annotation, etc. The Machine Status menu or Setup menus can be displayed using the buttons in the Tools menu.

Tools menu

For details on the Tools menu, see page 149.

For details on the Machine Status menu, see page 91.

For details on the Setup menu, see page 60.

J History buttonThe History menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The menu is used to check the incoming call and outgoing call histories or to call a remote party from the history list.

Details

Previous

Adjustments

Brightness

Preset

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

49Using the Menus

Page 50: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

History menu

For details on the History menu, see page 111.

K Phone Book buttonThe Phone Book opens when you select the button and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The menu is used to register a remote party to the Phone Book or to call a remote party registered in the Phone Book.

Phone Book

For details on the Phone Book, see page 120.

L Connect buttonThe Connect menu opens when you select “Connect” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The Connect menu is used to call a remote party.

Detailed Dial

History

Phone Book

IP:192.168.0.11

Home

5/11/2008 13:00

Missed Call

Answer

Dial Dial History1 111.111.111.112 2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)

Dial History2 555-555-555 2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)

Dial History3 17.17.17.17 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)

Dial History4 18.18.18.18 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)

Dial History5 19.19.19.19 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)

Dial History6 20.20.20.20 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)

Dial History7 66.66.66.66 2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)

Dial History8 88.88.88.88 2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)

Office ARoom 102Room 101

Office ERoom 202Room 201

ISDN 98-7654-3210IP 255.255.255.255ISDN 01-2345-6789

ISDN 01-2345-6789IP 123.456.789.012IP 0.0.0.0

Detailed Dial

History

New Entry

Group Edit

Phone Book

Home

Group1

Default Group

Group2

Group3

Group4

Group5

Group6

Group7

Group8

Group9

50 Using the Menus

Page 51: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

Connect menu

For details, see “Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu” on page 107.

M Detailed Dial buttonThe Detailed Dial menu opens when you select the Detailed Dial button and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The menu is used to call a remote party by setting the details of the dial setup options.

Detailed Dial menu

For details on the Detailed Dial menu, see page 114.

N Instruction displayThe instructions for the operation in the Home menu are displayed.

O Line interface select buttonSelecting the button opens the drop-down list of the line interface. Select the interface to be used, then press the ENTER button.

P Number input boxTo call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book, select the box and enter the party’s IP address, Domain name, ISDN line number, etc.

Select from History

Previous

Enter Number/Address

Select from Phone Book

Connect

IP:192.168.0.11 5/11/2008 13:00

1Number of Connected Sites

History

Detailed Dial

1024kbps

1B (64K)

IP

Phone Book

Dial to:

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Number of Lines

Home

Cancel

51Using the Menus

Page 52: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Q Dial buttonTo call a remote party whose number or address has been entered in the number input box, select this button, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

R One-touch dial buttonsThe submenu is displayed when you select a thumbnail for a remote party you want to call and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander. Using the submenu you can call the remote party.You can also call the remote parties assigned to the one-touch buttons by pressing the F1 to F4 buttons on the Remote Commander.

S Display

1 Video input The selected video input on the local system is displayed.The displayed video input is shown as the label set in “Custom Input Label” in the Video setup menu.

2 Audio inputThe selected audio input on the local system is displayed.

3 LAN statusThe current status of LAN connection is shown. The LAN indicator is shown in white when LAN is enabled for use and in gray when it is disabled.

4 ISDN statusThe current status of the ISDN unit ports is shown. The port indicator is shown in white when it is enabled for use and in gray when it is disabled.

5 IndicatorsThe status indicators for when the microphone is off, a “Memory Stick” is inserted, a pen tablet is connected, streaming broadcast is being executed, recording is being executed, etc. are displayed.

6 Audio level meterThe current audio input level is displayed.

HomeNEAR

321 4 5 6

87

52 Using the Menus

Page 53: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

7 Volume

The volume-level bar is temporarily shown when you adjust the volume of the Communication System.

8 Warning messagesIf system malfunction occurs, a warning, instruction, etc. are displayed.

53Using the Menus

Page 54: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The basic operation through the menu is explained taking manual brightness adjustment in the Camera menu as an example.

Buttons used for menu operations

1 Display the Home menu.

Operation Using the Menu

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

/

RF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ABC DEF

PRESENTATION

LAYOUT

RETURN

CONNECT

ON/OFF

MIC

BACKSPACE DISCONNECT

TONE DOT

TOOLS

VOLUME ZOOM

ENTER

VIDEO INPUT CAMERA

PCS-RF1

DOT button

Number buttons

ENTER button

V/v/B/b buttons

RETURN button

Connect

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Home

AAA Ready to connect.Ready

54 Using the Menus

Page 55: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Camera”,

then press the ENTER button.

The Camera menu appears.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Brightness”, then press the ENTER button.

The Brightness menu appears.

4 Press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.Now you can select the adjustment mode.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button to select the desired item from the drop-down list, then press the ENTER button.

The menu goes to Manual Adjustment mode.

Details

Previous

Adjustments

Brightness

PresetCamera

5/11/2008 13:00

Adjustments > Brightness

Auto Adjustment

Previous

5/11/2008 13:00

Adjustments > Brightness

Manual Adjustment

Previous

5/11/2008 13:00

55Using the Menus

Page 56: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

6 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the brightness adjustment bar, then press the ENTER button.

7 Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the brightness of the image, then press the ENTER button.

8 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Previous”, then press the ENTER button after the adjustment is finished.You can also use the RETURN button on the Remote Commander.

The Brightness menu is restored.

9 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Previous”, then press the ENTER button. You can also use the RETURN button on the Remote Commander.

The Camera menu is restored.

When the “Save” button is displayed in the menuWhen the setting or adjustment is finished, press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save” and press the ENTER button. The setting or adjusted value becomes effective.

When the “Cancel” button is displayed in the menuIf you press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Cancel” and press the ENTER button, the setting or adjustment is canceled and the previous one is restored.

Adjustments > Brightness

Manual Adjustment

Previous

5/11/2008 13:00

56 Using the Menus

Page 57: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

This section explains how to enter the letters, numbers or symbols in the text box in the menu using the Remote Commander.

To enter letters or numbers

1 Press the F1 button repeatedly to enable the letters or numbers to be input.

2 Press the number buttons to enter a letter or number you want.

You can enter the letter shown on each button by pressing it repeatedly.

You can enter the number shown on each button by pressing it once.

To enter a symbolPress the F2 button repeatedly to select the desired symbol. Pressing the 0 button repeatedly also enables you to enter a symbol.

To enter a dot (.) for an IP addressPress the b button or DOT button.

To delete a characterPress the BACK SPACE button. The last entered character is deleted.

Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

/

RF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ABC DEF

PRESENTATION

LAYOUT

RETURN

CONNECT

ON/OFF

MIC

BACKSPACE DISCONNECT

TONE DOT

TOOLS

VOLUME ZOOM

ENTER

VIDEO INPUT CAMERA

PCS-RF1

Number buttons

BACK SPACE button

b button

F1 button

DOT button

F3 button

F2 button

57Using the Menus

Page 58: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To delete all the characters enteredPress the F3 button.

This section explains how to enter the letters or numbers in the text box in the menu using the on-screen keyboard displayed on the monitor screen.

When “Display On-Screen Keyboard” is set to “On” in the Menu Screens page of the General setup menu (page 82), the on-screen keyboard automatically appears on the screen if character input is required in the menu.

You can also use the buttons on the Remote Commander even when the on-screen keyboard is displayed on the screen.

To enter letters or numbers

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Num” or “Alpha” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button.

Select “Num” to enter numbers, and “Alpha” to enter alphabetic letters.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the button on the on-screen keyboard on which the desired character is indicated, then press the ENTER button.

When you select a number, the selected number is entered.

When you select an alphabetic letter, a submenu with available letters appears on the on-screen keyboard. Select the desired letter and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander. The selected letter is entered.

Entering Characters Using the On-Screen Keyboard

Note

Num ABC DEF

MNO

1

GHI JKL

PQRS TUV WXYZ Symbol

0 Dot

Space

End Cancel

Alpha

BackSpace

58 Using the Menus

Page 59: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 1: Installation and P

reparation

3 Repeat step 2 to enter all the letters or numbers.

4 After the input is complete, select “End”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To enter a symbol

1 Select “Symbol” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

The submenu with available symbols are displayed.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the desired symbol, then press the ENTER button.

The selected symbol is entered.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the symbols.

4 After the input is complete, select “End”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To enter a dot (.) for an IP addressSelect “b” or “Dot” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To enter a spaceSelect “Space”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To delete a characterTo erase the last entered character, select “Back Space”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To delete all the characters enteredSelect “Cancel”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.Pressing the F3 button on the Remote Commander also deletes all the characters entered.

ABC

Alpha

DEF

MNO

1

GHI JKL

PQRS TUV WXYZ Symbol

0 Dot

Space

End Cancel

BackSpacePrevious

A B C

a b c

59Using the Menus

Page 60: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This chapter describes the registration and settings to be carried out by the system administrator.The chapter is intended to be read by the system administrator.

Registering Local InformationBefore connecting, set up the local system using the Setup menus. This section describes how to display the Setup menus and gives a introduction to the menus.

1 Press the Tools button on the Remote Commander, or use the V, v, B or b button to select “Tools” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.The Tools menu appears on the monitor screen.

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Opening the Setup Menu

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

60 Registering Local Information

Page 61: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The Setup menu appears on the monitor screen.

Menus available from a setup menuThe Setup menus are grouped into the following depending on the setting items. The setup menus that include many setting items are divided into multiple pages. Select an appropriate menu button to set the respective item.The commonly-used menu butttons are displayed on the screen at the factory. Pressing the F4 button on the Remote Commander allows you to display the maximum number of setup menu buttons. To restore the commonly-used setup display, press the F4 button again.

For a description of each setup menu, see the page for that menu indicated below.Line Interface setup menu (see page 64)Dial setup menu (see page 64)Answer setup menu (see page 65)Multipoint setup menu (see page 65)Communication setup menu (see page 66)Audio setup menu (see page 69)Video setup menu (see page 72) LAN setup menu (see page 74)QoS setup menu (see page 76)TOS setup menu (see page 77)SIP setup menu (see page 78) ISDN setup menu (see page 79)Annotation setup menu (see page 80)Camera setup menu (see page 81)General setup menu (see page 81)Home Menu setup menu (see page 83)Administrator setup menu (see page 85)Encryption setup menu (see page 89)Shared Phone Book setup menu (see page 90)

Setup Line I/F

Back to Tools

Home Line Interface

IP

Primary Line Interface

Use LAN2 Off

ISDN SIP

IP ISDN SIP

Dial

Line I/F

Answer

Multipoint

Audio1

Video2

LAN

LAN

LAN

SIP

Menu buttons

61Registering Local Information

Page 62: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The Multipoint setup menu is displayed only when the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is installed in the Communication System.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the menu button you want to set, then press the ENTER or b button.The selected setup menu appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the setting item, then press the ENTER button.

5 Select the desired item from the drop-down list, or enter the characters in the text box.

For individual items, see pages 64 to 89.

6 After the selection or character input is completed, use the V, v, B or b button to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The setting is saved, and the Setup menu is restored.

Note

Setup Dial

Telephone Mode

More Options Enable

User Name Input

Prefix

Prefix-A

Prefix-B

Prefix-C

LAN Prefix

LAN Prefix

Dial

Auto

On

On

Prefix-None

Disable

CancelSave

Menu button

Setting items

Setup Dial

Telephone Mode AutoDial

CancelSave

AutoG.711 µ-lawG.711 A-law

62 Registering Local Information

Page 63: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

To cancel the setupUse the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Cancel”, then press the ENTER button. Or press the RETURN button on the Remote Commander.

To return to the left columnPress the B button or RETURN button on the Remote Commander.

63Registering Local Information

Page 64: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The Line Interface setup menu is used to select the line interface you use for connection with a remote party.

Line I/F

Line InterfaceAllows you to select the line interface from among “IP”, “ISDN” and “SIP”. You can select multiple interfaces.

Primary Line InterfaceAllows you to select the line interface you use most from among IP, SIP and ISDN.

Use LAN2Allows you to select whether to use the 2 (LAN2) connector on the rear of the Communication System.Off: Select when you do not use the 2

(LAN2) connector.On: Select when you use the 2 (LAN2)

connector.

When “Use LAN2” is set to “On”, some of the functions using the 2 connector are restricted. For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of LAN2” on page 95.

The Dial setup menu is used to set the attributes for dialing.

Dial

Telephone ModeAllows you to select the audio compression format when conducting a voice meeting.Auto: Selects an appropriate format

automatically.G.711µ-law: Selects the format based on the

G.711µ-law standard.G.711A-law: Selects the format based on

the G.711A-law standard.

More Options EnableAllows you to select whether to display the More Options button in the List Edit menu of the Phone Book. You can set the detailed items for dialing in the List Edit menu by selecting the More Options button.On: Displays the More Options button.Off: Does not display the More Options

button.

User Name InputAllows you to select whether to register user names in the communications log when connection is made.Off: Disables the recording of the user

names.On: Select when you want to record user

names. Each time dialing takes place, the user name input menu appears.

PrefixSelect the prefix number (call number prefixed to a line number).Prefix-None: Select when you are not using

a prefix number.Prefix-A: Select when you use the prefix set

in “Prefix-A”.Prefix-B: Select when you use the prefix set

in “Prefix-B”.Prefix-C: Select when you use the prefix set

in “Prefix-C”.

Prefix-AWhen “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-A”, the line number prefixed by the prefix (dial number) registered in this box is dialed.

Prefix-BWhen “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-B”, the line number prefixed by the prefix (dial number) registered in this box is dialed.

Prefix-CWhen “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-C”, the line number prefixed by the prefix (dial number) registered in this box is dialed.

Enter “9” when this is required to make an outgoing call.

Line Interface Setup Menu

Note

Dial Setup Menu

Line I/F

Dial

Note

64 Registering Local Information

Page 65: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Select LAN PrefixAllows you to select whether to use the LAN prefix when dialing via a LAN.Disable: Disables the LAN prefix.Enable: Enables the LAN prefix.

LAN PrefixWhen dialing using the IP connection, the information entered into this box is added to the beginning of the IP address. Select whether to use the LAN prefix in “Select LAN Prefix”.

The Answer setup menu is used to set up call reception.

Answer

Auto AnswerAllows you to select whether the system answers calls automatically.On: Answers calls automatically. When a

call comes in, the line is automatically connected.

Off: Allows you to answer calls manually. When a call comes in, the phone rings. If you select “OK” in the “Answer?” message, the line is connected.

ISDN MSNAllows you to select whether you are using the Multiple Subscriber Number.Off: Select when you do not use the

Multiple Subscriber Number.On: Select when you use the Multiple

Subscriber Number.

Mic on AnswerAllows you to select whether to transmit audio from your site when you receive a call and connect it.On: Enables transmission of audio when

answering a call.Off: Disables transmission of audio when

answering a call.

Reject AnswerAllows you to select whether to connect a remote party’s calling during communication.On: Disables the connection of a remote

party.Off: Enables the connection of a remote

party.

For details, see “Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function” on page 131.

The Multipoint setup menu is used to set up multipoint connection when the local system is used as the main terminal.The menu is displayed only when the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is installed in the Communication System.

For the procedure how to install the PCSA-MCG80 software, see page 190.

When the local system is used as the main terminal and connected with remote terminals other than the PCS-XG80/XG80S, the maximum bandwidth to be used is restricted to 4 Mbps.

Multipoint

Multipoint ModeAUTO: Switches from point-to-point

connection to multipoint connection automatically.

On: Enables you to make a multipoint connection at any time.

Broadcast ModeAllows you to select the broadcast mode.Split: Displays the picture from the

connected terminals in split windows.Voice Activate: Detects the terminal where

a speaker has the loudest voice, and automatically transmits the picture of this terminal to all other terminals.

Voice Activate (720P): Enables transmission of pictures with resolution

Answer Setup Menu

Answer

Multipoint Setup Menu

Note

Multipoint

65Registering Local Information

Page 66: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

of 720p (1280 × 720 pixels) in H.264 Video Mode when “Voice Activate” mode is activated.

• The “Voice Activate (720P)” mode cannot be selected when the communication is made via an ISDN or SIP connection. Even for an IP connection, this mode is not available if the remote party does not support H.264 Video Mode.

• When “Broadcast Mode” is set to “Voice Activate (720P)”, you cannot change “Broadcast Mode” during communication. Select the Broadcast Mode before starting communication.

SplitAllows you to select the type of split display used to display local and remote pictures on a single monitor during a multipoint connection. Automatic: When there are two or three

terminals connected, the display is automatically split into four parts. When there are four or five terminals connected, it is split into six parts.

Six-screen Mosaic: The display is split into six parts regardless of the number of terminals connected.

When there is only one terminal connected, the display switches to full screen regardless of the selection of the setting.

The Communication setup menu is used to set up communications.

The contents of the Communication menu vary with “Line Interface” setting in the Line I/F setup menu, or “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” setting in the Communication setup menu.The Communication page number after the Communication2 page also varies according to the number of setting items.

IPThe menu is used to set up the communication mode for the IP connection.

Individual Settings for Transmission/ReceptionAllows you to select whether to configure the IP settings for transmission and reception individually.Off: Select to configure the IP settings for

transmission and reception commonly.On: Select to configure the IP settings for

transmission and reception individually.

Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/MultipointAllows you to select whether to configure the IP settings for a point-to-point connection and multipoint connection individually.Off: Select to configure the IP settings for

both connections commonly.On: Select to configure the IP settings for a

point-to-point connection and multipoint connection individually.

The setting items and page numbers in the IP: Mode page vary according to the setting of “Individual Settings”.

IP: Mode

Total BandwidthAllows you to select the total bandwidth to be used with this system.In multipoint connection, the total bandwidth of all points is displayed.You can select from among 128Kbps, 384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps and Other.

In multipoint connection, the actual Communication Bit Rate for each point is automatically adjusted so as not to exceed “Total Bandwidth”.

Notes

Note

Communication Setup Menu

Note

Note

Note

Communication

Communication

66 Registering Local Information

Page 67: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Communication Bit RateAllows you to select the communication bit rate per point.When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this item for transmission and reception, and point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.You can select from among 128Kbps, 384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps and Other.

Audio ModeAllows you to select the compression format of audio to be sent to a remote party. When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this item for transmission and reception, and point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.You can select multiple formats from among G.711, G.722, G.728 and MPEG4 (MPEG4 AAC).

When the remote system does not support the audio mode selected by the local site, the mode automatically becomes “G.711”.

Far End Camera ControlAllows you to select whether to enable the control of each other’s cameras from each other’s site.When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” for IP is set to “On”, you can set this item individually for point-to-point and multipoint connections.On: Enables the control of each other’s

cameras. Normally, set to “On”.Off: Disables the control of each other’s

cameras.

H.239Use of the presentation mode complying with H.239 allows you to transmit the presentation data and picture from the camera simultaneously.

This item allows you to select whether to use the presentation mode based on the H.239 presentation standard.On: Enables the presentation mode based on

the H.239 presentation standard.Off: Disables the presentation mode based

on the H.239 presentation standard.

H.239 RatioWhen H.239 presentation transmissions are made with the system, the H.239 presentation data shares bandwidth with camera images that are also being sent. This setting allows you to select how much of the total bandwidth to use for H.239 presentation data transmissions.2/3: Use 2/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.1/2: Use 1/2 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.1/3: Use 1/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.

Screen SizeAllows you to select the screen size of the picture to be transmitted or received.When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this item for transmission and reception, and point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.You can select from among 720, W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF and AUTO.

Video ModeAllows you to select the compression format of pictures to be transmitted or received. When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this item for transmission and reception, and point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.You can select from among H.261, H.263+, and H.264.

Video FrameAllows you to select the number of video frames during transmission or reception.

Note

67Registering Local Information

Page 68: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this item for transmission and reception, and point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.15fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 15 frames per second.30fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 30 frames per second.60fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 60 frames per second.AUTO: Switch the number of frames

automatically.

ISDNThe menu is used to set up the communication mode for an ISDN connection.

Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/MultipointAllows you to select whether to configure the ISDN settings for point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.Off: Select to configure the ISDN settings

for both connections commonly.On: Select to configure the ISDN settings

for point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.

The setting items and page numbers for “ISDN: Mode” varies according to the setting of “Individual Settings”.

ISDN: Mode

ISDN Bandwidth (Dial)Allows you to select the number of ISDN lines used for dialing.When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to “On”, you can set this item for point-to-point and multipoint connections individually.You can select from among 1B (64K), 2B (128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K), 5B (320K), 6B (384K), 8B (512K) and 12B (768K).

ISDN Bandwidth (Answer)Allows you to select the number of ISDN lines used for answering.You can select from among 1B (64K), 2B (128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K), 5B (320K), 6B (384K), 8B (512K) and 12B (768K).

Audio ModeAllows you to select the compression format of audio to be sent to a remote party. You can select from among G.711, G.722, G.728 and MPEG4 (MPEG4 AAC).

When the remote system does not support the audio mode selected by the local site, the mode automatically becomes “G.711”.

Far End Camera ControlAllows you to select whether to enable the control of each other’s cameras from each other’s site.On: Enables the control of each other’s

cameras. Normally, set to “On”.Off: Disables the control of each other’s

cameras.

H.239Allows you to select whether to use the presentation mode based on the H.239 presentation standard.On: Enables the presentation mode based on

the H.239 presentation standard.Off: Disables the presentation mode based

on the H.239 presentation standard.

H.239 RatioWhen H.239 presentation transmissions are made with the system, the H.239 presentation data shares bandwidth with camera images that are also being sent. This setting allows you to select how much of the total bandwidth to use for H.239 presentation data transmissions.2/3: Use 2/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.1/2: Use 1/2 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.1/3: Use 1/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239

presentation data transmissions.

Note

Communication

Communication

Note

68 Registering Local Information

Page 69: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

RestrictAllows you to select the ISDN transmission rate.Auto: Select when connecting a remote

party via a normal ISDN line.56K: Select when connecting a remote party

located in a region or country where the ISDN transmission rate is 56 Kbps.

The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the transmission rate of 64 Kbps by default. However, some countries, such as the USA, and some regions may use the ISDN transmission rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You may not communicate with such countries or regions at 64 Kbps, so you must therefore set “Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.

Screen SizeAllows you to select the screen size of the picture to be transmitted or received.You can select from among W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF and AUTO.

Video ModeAllows you to select the compression format of pictures to be transmitted or received.You can select from among H.261, H.263+, and H.264.

Video FrameAllows you to select the number of video frames during transmission or reception.15fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 15 frames per second.30fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 30 frames per second.AUTO: Switch the number of frames

automatically.

SIP: Mode

Communication Bit RateAllows you to select the communication bit rate per pointYou can select from among 128Kbps, 384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps and Other.

Audio ModeAllows you to select the compression format of audio to be sent to a remote party. You can select from among G.728, G.722 and G.711.

When the remote system does not support the audio mode selected by the local site, the mode automatically becomes “G.711”.

Far End Camera ControlAllows you to select whether to enable the control of each other’s cameras from each other’s site.On: Enables the control of each other’s

cameras. Normally, set to “On”.Off: Disables the control of each other’s

cameras.

Screen SizeAllows you to select the screen size of the picture to be transmitted or received.You can select from among 720, W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF and AUTO.

Video ModeAllows you to select the compression format of pictures to be transmitted or received.You can select from among H.261, H.263+, H.264 and MPEG4.

Video FrameAllows you to select the number of video frames during transmission or reception.15fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 15 frames per second.30fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 30 frames per second.60fps: Send CIF format pictures at a

maximum rate of 60 frames per second.AUTO: Switch the number of frames

automatically.

The Audio setup menu is used to set various audio items.

Note

Communication

Note

Audio Setup Menu

69Registering Local Information

Page 70: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Basic Setup1

Audio InputAllows you to select the audio input.MIC: Inputs audio from the microphone.AUX: Inputs audio from auxiliary external

equipment.MIC+AUX: Inputs audio from the

microphone and auxiliary external equipment.

When “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On” in the Video setup menu, “Audio Input”, “Input Select (MIC)” and “Input Select (AUX)” cannot be selected.

Input Select (MIC)/Input Select (AUX)Allows you to select the microphone and/or external equipment from which an audio signal is input.The options that can be selected vary with the Autio Input setting.When you select “MIC” from “Audio Input”, you can select one of the following four options. When you select “AUX”, you can select “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”. When you select “MIC+AUX”, you can select two options: one microphone input from “MIC (A1/A3)”, “EC MIC (A7)”, “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”, and one auxiliary external input from “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”.MIC (A1/A3): Select use of the PCS-A1

microphone (supplied with the PCS-XG80) or PCSA-A3 microphone (not supplied) connected to the MIC (A1/A3) jacks on the Communication System.

EC-MIC (A7): Select use of the PCSA-A7 echo canceling microphone (not supplied) connected to the EC-MIC (A7) jacks on the Communication System.

AUDIO 1: Select to input the audio of external equipment connected to the AUDIO 1 IN jacks on the Communication System.

AUDIO 2: Select to input the audio of external equipment connected to the

AUDIO 2 IN jacks on the Communication System.

Echo CancellerAllows you to select whether to use the internal echo canceller.On: Enables the internal echo canceller.Off: Disables the internal echo canceller.

Lip SyncAllows you to select whether to use the Lip Sync function.Auto: Enables the Lip Sync function.Off: Disables the Lip Sync function.

• When “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”, “Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or “Forward Error Correction (FEC)” is set to “On” in the QoS setup menu, you cannot set “Lip Sync” to “Off”.

• When “Lip Sync” is set to “Off”, you cannot change the setting for “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”, “Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or “Forward Error Correction (FEC)” in the QoS setup menu.

Recording MuteWhen you connect an audio recording device to the AUDIO 1 IN or AUDIO 2 IN and REC OUT jacks to record audio, this function reduces oscillations in sound that occur due to loop-back within audio recording device.Off: Disables the recording mute function.On: Enables the recording mute function.

• When “Recording Mute” is set to “On”, only signals from external equipment are affected. Signals from the microphones or remote sites are not affected. Therefore, the Recording Mute functions only when “Audio Input” is set to “AUX” or “MIC+AUX.”

• When connecting an audio recording device to the AUDIO 1 IN or AUDIO 2 IN and REC OUT jacks, set “Recording Mute” to “On” and record the sound only from the audio recording device. If you want to record the sound on your site as well, also use the microphone input.

Note

Audio1

Notes

Notes

70 Registering Local Information

Page 71: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Input ModeAllows you to select the input audio mode.Stereo: Inputs audio to the R/L jacks of the

audio input as stereo left and right sounds.

Monaural: Inputs audio to the R/L jacks of the audio input as monaural sound.

Output ModeAllows you to select the output audio mode.Stereo: Outputs audio from the AUDIO

OUT R/L or HDMI OUT jacks as stereo left and right sounds.

Monaural: Outputs audio from the AUDIO OUT R/L or HDMI OUT jacks as monaural sound.

Basic Setup2

AUX Local Monitor OutAllows you to select whether the audio input from the AUDIO 1 IN or AUDIO 2 IN jacks outputs to the audio output jacks on the Communication System.On: Enables output from the audio output.Off: Disables output from the audio output.

Reversed MIC InputsAllows you to select whether to transmit the audio input from the microphone with right and left reversed. If you select “On”, you can match the right and left of the camera image and audio.Off: Transmits the audio with right and left

not reversed.On: Transmits the audio with right and left

reversed.

Audio Input Delay SettingAllows you to set Audio Input Delay to synchronize the audio with the video input.Default –100ms: Selects the default delay

minus 100ms.Default –50ms: Selects the default delay

minus 50ms.Default: Selects the default delay.Default + 50ms: Selects the default delay

plus 50ms.Default + 100ms: Selects the default delay

plus 100ms.Custom: Uses the Audio Input Delay you

set.

Audio Input DelayWhen you set “Audio Input Delay Setting” to “Custom”, you can set the delay time of the input audio to match the image and audio.

Audio Output Delay SettingAllows you to set Audio Output Delay to synchronize the audio with the video output.Default –100ms: Selects the default delay

minus 100ms.Default –50ms: Selects the default delay

minus 50ms.Default: Selects the default delay.Default + 50ms: Selects the default delay

plus 50ms.Default + 100ms: Selects the default delay

plus 100ms.Custom: Uses the Audio Output Delay you

set.

Audio Output DelayWhen you set “Audio Output Delay Setting” to “Custom”, you can set the delay time of the output audio to match the image and audio.

REC OUT ModeStereo: The mixed sounds of the remote and

local sites are output from the REC OUT R and L jacks in stereo.

Monaural 2ch: The sounds of the remote and local sites are output from the REC OUT R and L jacks separately.

Sound Effect

Beep SoundAllows you to select the volume of the beep that sounds each time you press a button on the Remote Commander from among “Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can also select “Off” for the beep not to sound.

Sound EffectAllows you to select the volume of output sound when the system starts, or when connection starts or is disconnected from among “Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can also select “Off” for the sound not to be output.

Audio2

Audio3

71Registering Local Information

Page 72: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Dial ToneAllows you to select the volume of a ring-back and busy tones when you are dialing from among “Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can also select “Off” for the ring-back and busy tones not to be output.

Ringer ToneAllows you to select the volume of a ring tone when you receive a call from among “Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can also select “Off” for the ring tone not to be output.

The Video setup menu is used to set up video input/output.

Basic Setup

Video InputAllows you to select the video input.Camera: Selects the camera picture from

the camera connected to the CAMERA connector.

RGB: Selects the video signal from the external equipment connected to the RGB IN connector.

YPbPr: Selects the video signal from the external equipment connected to the VIDEO IN YPbPr connector.

S-VIDEO: Selects the video signal from the external equipment connected to the S VIDEO IN connector.

Presentation ScreenAllows you to select the display pattern of the presentation screen.Full Screen: Displays the computer picture,

etc. from the external equipment connected to the RGB IN connector in full screen mode.

PandP: Displays the computer picture, etc. from the external equipment connected to the RGB IN connector and the selected input picuture such as a camera picture in PandP mode.

Side by Side: Displays the computer picture, etc. from the external equipment connected to the RGB IN connector and

the selected input picture such as a camera picture in Side by Side mode.

Monitor OutputAllows you to select the video signal output from the Communication System.HDMI: Outputs the video signal to the

external equipment connected to the HDMI OUT connector.

RGB: Outputs the video signal to the external equipment connected to the RGB OUT connector.

HDMI+RGB: Outputs the video signal to the external equipment connected to the HDMI OUT and RGB OUT connectors.

• If “Monitor Output” is set to “HDMI+RGB” when no HDMI monitor is connected to the Communication System, you cannot view the menus. Before making this setting, be sure to connect an HDMI monitor.

• When you change the setting of “Monitor Output” to an incorrect setting, no picture is displayed on the screen. In this case, select the correct setting for “Monitor Output” using the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System and the buttons on the Remote Commander. When the ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System stays lit, perform the steps below.

1 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System.

2 Within five seconds after you pressed the ?/1 switch, press the buttons on the Remote Commander described below depending on the desired “Monitor Output”.HDMI: VIDEO INPUT button (once) then Number button 3 (three times)RGB: VIDEO INPUT button (once) then Number button 4 (three times)HDMI+RGB: VIDEO INPUT button (once) then Number button 5 (three times)

The setting of “Monitor Output” is changed, and the picture will be displayed on the screen.

RGB Monitor Output FormatAllows you to select the format of the signal output from the RGB OUT connector.SXGA: Outputs the SXGA signal.

Video Setup Menu

Video1

Notes

72 Registering Local Information

Page 73: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

XGA: Outputs the XGA signal.WXGA: Outputs the WXGA signal.

Blanking PeriodAllows you to select the blackout period that occurs temporarily when the input picture is switched when the monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT connector.You can select among from Long, Medium and Short.

FrequencyAllows you to select the frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz for video input/output.

• “Frequency” is set to “60 Hz” at the factory. Note that video may not be output or the menu not displayed on the screen when “Frequency” is set to “50 Hz” if the connected equipment does not support the frequency of 50 Hz.

• When you change the setting of “Frequency”, the system will reboot. If you change it to an incorrect setting, no picture is displayed on the screen after rebooting. In this case, select the correct setting for “Frequency” using the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System and the buttons on the Remote Commander. When the ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System blinks then stays lit after rebooting, perform the steps below.1 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the

Communication System.2 Within five seconds after you pressed the

?/1 switch, press the buttons on the Remote Commander described below depending on the desired Frequency.60 Hz: VIDEO INPUT button (once) then Number button 1 (three times)50 Hz: VIDEO INPUT button (once) then Number button 2 (three times)

The setting of “Frequency” is changed, and the system will reboot.

Custom Input Label

Allows you to set the names of the selected video inputs using up to 12 characters.

Custom Input Label (Camera)Selects when “Camera” is selected in “Video Input”.

Custom Input Label (RGB)Selects when “RGB” is selected in “Video Input”.

Custom Input Label (YPbPr)Selects when “YPbPr” is selected in “Video Input”.

Custom Input Label (S VIDEO)Selects when “S VIDEO” is selected in “Video Input”.

Link to MicAllows you to select whether to link an audio input to the selected video input.

Link to Audio InputAllows you to switch the audio input in conjunction with switching the video input by linking each video input and a specific microphone or other audio input.Off: Switches the video input and the

microphone or other audio input separately.

On: Links switching of the video input and the microphone or other audio input.

When “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On”, “Audio Input”, “Input Select (MIC)” and “Input Select (AUX)” on the Basic Setup1 page of Audio setup menu cannot be selected.

Video InputAllows you to select the video input.Camera: Selects the camera picture from

the camera connected to the CAMERA connector.

S-VIDEO: Selects the picture from the external equipment connected to the S VIDEO IN connector.

RGB: Selects the picture from the external equipment connected to the RGB IN connector.

YPbPr: Selects the picture from the external equipment connected to the YPbPr jacks.

Notes

Video2

Note

Video3

73Registering Local Information

Page 74: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Audio InputAllows you to select the audio input which is linked to the video input selected in “Video Input” when “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On”.MIC: Inputs audio from the microphone.AUX: Inputs audio from the external

equipment.MIC+AUX: Inputs audio both from the

microphone and external equipment.

Input Select (MIC)Input Select (AUX)Allows you to select the audio input from the microphone and/or external equipment when “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On”.The options that can be selected vary with the Audio Input setting.When you select “MIC” from “Audio Input”, you can select one of the following four options. When you select “AUX”, you can select “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”. When you select “MIC+AUX”, you can select two options: one microphone input from “MIC (A1/A3)”, “EC MIC (A7)”, “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”, and one auxiliary external input from “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2”.MIC (A1/A3): Select use of the PCS-A1

microphone (supplied with the PCS-XG80) or PCSA-A3 microphone (not supplied) connected to the MIC (A1/A3) jacks on the Communication System.

EC-MIC (A7): Select use of the PCSA-A7 echo canceling microphone (not supplied) connected to the EC-MIC (A7) jacks on the Communication System.

AUDIO 1: Select to input the audio of external equipment connected to the AUDIO 1 IN jacks on the Communication System.

AUDIO 2: Select to input the audio of external equipment connected to the AUDIO 2 IN jacks on the Communication System.

The LAN setup menu is used to set up LAN connection.

For details about the settings, consult your network administrator.

The contents of the LAN setup menu vary with the “Use LAN2” setting in the Line Interface setup menu, or “Internet Protocol” setting in the Administrator setup menu.The LAN page number after the LAN2 page also varies according to the number of setting items.

Basic Setup

Host NameEnter your host name (up to 30 characters).

DHCP ModeAllows you to select whether the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is enabled.Auto: The IP address, network mask,

gateway address and DNS address are automatically assigned.

Off: Disables the DHCP server. In this case, enter an IP address, network mask, gateway address and DNS address.

Prefix LengthConfigure the prefix length of the IPv6 address within the range of 0 to 128.

IP AddressEnter the IP address.

Network MaskEnter the network mask.

Gateway AddressEnter the default gateway address.

Primary DNSEnter a primary DNS address.

Secondary DNSEnter a secondary DNS address.

LAN ModeAllows you to select the interface type and the communication mode of the LAN connection.

LAN Setup Menu

Note

LAN

74 Registering Local Information

Page 75: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Auto: The interface type and the communication mode are detected automatically.

100Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via 100BASE-TX in full duplex mode.

100Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via 100BASE-TX in half duplex mode.

10Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via 10BASE-T in full duplex mode.

10Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via 10BASE-T in half duplex mode.

PPPoE

PPPoEAllows you to select whether to use PPPoE for LAN connection. When using PPPoE, you can use the B FLET’S* or FLET’S ADSL service without connecting a router.Off: Does not use PPPoE.LAN1: Uses PPPoE for LAN connection

using the 1 (LAN1) connector.LAN2: Uses PPPoE for LAN connection

using the 2 (LAN2) connector.

• Operations of PPPoE for LAN connection are presently verified only for the Japanese NTT B FLET’S and FLET’S ADSL services.

• The PPPoE registration status appears at the bottom of the screen for each page.

* “FLET’S” is a trademark of NTT East and NTT West Corporations in Japan.

User AliasEnter a user name when you use PPPoE for LAN connection.

PasswordEnter a password when you use PPPoE for LAN connection.

Fixed IP for PPPoESelect whether to make a PPPoE connection using a fixed IP address.Off: Does not use a fixed IP address for a

PPPoE connection.On: Uses a fixed IP address for a PPPoE

connection.

Fixed IP Address for PPPoEEnter an IP address when “Fixed IP for PPPoE” is set to “On”.

DNSAllows you to select whether to obtain DNS server addresses automatically or to specify them manually when connecting to a LAN using PPPoE.Obtain automatically: Assigns DNS server

addresses automatically.Specify: Allows you to specify DNS server

addresses.

Primary DNSEnter a primary DNS address.

Secondary DNSEnter a secondary DNS address.

NAT Setup

NAT ModeAllows you to select whether you connect the system to a local network using Network Address Translation (NAT), which allows one IP address to be shared by several computers on the same LAN.Auto: Enables or disables the NAT mode by

automatically detecting the use of NAT. This option is effective only when you use the UPnP router.

On: Enables NAT mode.Off: Disables NAT mode.

WAN IP AddressEnter the IP address for the Wide Area Network (WAN).

Gatekeeper

Gatekeeper ModeAllows you to select whether to use the gatekeeper to control access to a LAN. Using the gatekeeper allows you to dial using the user name or user number as well as dialing using the IP address.Auto: Automatically detects the gatekeeper

and uses it.On: Enables the gatekeeper.Off: Disables the gatekeeper.

Notes

LAN

LAN

LAN

75Registering Local Information

Page 76: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Gatekeeper AddressEnter the address of the gatekeeper used when “Gatekeeper Mode” is set to “On”.

User AliasEnter the user name (H.323 alias) registered in the gatekeeper.

User NumberEnter the user number (E.164 number) registered in the gatekeeper.

H.460Allows you to select whether to use H.460 to traverse firewalls and connect to the terminals on other networks.On: Enables connection that traverses

H.460 standard firewalls.Off: Disables connection that traverses

firewalls.

Used Port Number, RTP/RTCP Setup

Q.931Enter the Q.931 port number.

H.245Enter the H.245 port number.

RTP/RTCPEnter the RTP/RTCP port number.

MTU SizeEnter the MTU size.

SNMP

SNMP ModeAllows you to select whether the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent is enabled.On: Enables the SNMP agent.Off: Disables the SNMP agent.

Trap DestinationEnter the address of the trap destination SNMP manager.

CommunityEnter the community name managed by the SNMP manager (up to 24 characters). By default, “public” is entered.

DescriptionEnter the description of this terminal. By default, “Videoconference Device” is entered and can not be changed.

LocationEnter the location where this terminal is installed (up to 30 characters).

ContactEnter information about the terminal administrator (up to 30 characters).

Specifies the functions for providing optimum consistent communication.

• When “Lip Sync” is set to “Off” in the Audio setup menu, you cannot change the setting for “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”, “Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or “Forward Error Correction (FEC)”.

• When “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”, “Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or “Forward Error Correction (FEC)” is set to “On”, you cannot set “Lip Sync” to “Off” in the Audio setup menu.

Basic Setup

Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)Allows you to select whether to always optimize the LAN bandwidth.On: Always optimizes the LAN bandwidth.Off: Does not optimize the LAN bandwidth.

Auto Bandwidth DetectionAllows you to select whether you use the Auto Bandwidth Detection feature.On: Enables the Auto Bandwidth Detection

feature.Off: Disables the Auto Bandwidth Detection

feature.

LAN

LAN

QoS Setup Menu

Notes

QoS1

76 Registering Local Information

Page 77: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

TCP Port NumberEnter the fixed TCP port number.

UDP Port NumberEnter the fixed UDP port number.

For details on the port numbers used on the system, see “List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-XG80/XG80S” on page 246.

Packet Resend Request (ARQ)Allows you to select whether to request packet to be resent when packet losses occur during communication.On: Requests packets to be resent.Off: Does not request packets to be resent.

When a multipoint connection is made among six points with “Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” set to “On”, the maximum bandwidth to be used is restricted to 7 Mbps.

ARQ Buffering TimeSet the buffering time used for “Packet Resend Request”.You can select from among “300ms”, “150ms”, “80ms”, “Auto” and “Custom”. When “Custom” is selected, you can specify any buffering time.

ARQ Buffering TimeEnter the buffering time (50 ms to 999 ms) when you select “Custom” in “ARQ Buffering Time”.

Forward Error Correction (FEC)Allows you to select whether received packets are identified with an error correction mark.On: Identifies with an error correction mark.Off: Not identify with an error correction

mark.

When “Forward Error Correction (FEC)” is set to “On”, the maximum bandwidth to be used is restricted to 8 Mbps.

FEC RedundancyAllows you to set redundancy of the packet used for the Forward Error Correction (FEC).

You can select from among “8”, “4”, “2” and “Auto”. When you select “8”, “4” and “2”, the communication bit rate may be different from the specified value.

Audio Duplex TransmissionAllows you to select whether to automatically transmit audio in double when audio communication is interrupted depending on a network status.On: Enables the Audio Duplex

Transmission feature.Off: Disables the Audio Duplex

Transmission feature.

Re-Order/Shaping

Re-OrderAllows you to select whether to correct re-order that may cause packet loss (invalid order of arrival in the packet). Correcting re-order enables smoother picture and sound.On: Corrects re-order.Off: Does not correct re-order.

Re-Order BufferAllows you to select re-order buffer.You can select from among “Auto”, “1”, “2” and “Custom”.

Re-Order Buffer RateEnter the re-order buffer rate. You can enter the value between 1 and 5.

ShapingAllows you to select whether to use shaping, which adjusts the IP packet transfer rate.On: Uses shaping.Off: Does not use shaping.

.

TOS

TOS Data TypeAllows you to select the type of data for which you configure the TOS (Type of Service) field.Video: Configure the TOS field for video

data.

Note

Note

TOS Setup Menu

QoS2

TOS

77Registering Local Information

Page 78: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Audio: Configure the TOS field for audio data.

Data: Configure the TOS field for camera control signals, etc.

Presentation: Configure the TOS field for the RGB presentation data.

TOSAllows you to select how to define the TOS (Type of Service) field of the data selected in “TOS Data Type”.Off: Does not define the TOS field.IP Precedence: Defines the TOS field as IP

Precedence.DSCP: Defines the TOS field as the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). Enter the value between 0 and 63.

PrecedenceEnter the IP Precedence value between 0 and 7.

Low DelayAllows you to select whether to specify the Low Delay bit of the TOS field.On: Specifies the Low Delay bit of the TOS

field.Off: Does not specify the Low Delay bit of

the TOS field.

High ThroughputAllows you to select whether to specify the High Throughput bit of the TOS field.On: Specifies the High Throughput bit of

the TOS field.Off: Does not specify the High Throughput

bit of the TOS field.

High ReliabilityAllows you to select whether to specify the High Reliability bit of the TOS field.On: Specifies the High Reliability bit of the

TOS field.Off: Does not specify the High Reliability

bit of the TOS field.

Minimum CostAllows you to select whether to specify the Minimum Cost bit of the TOS field.On: Specifies the Minimum Cost bit of the

TOS field.

Off: Does not specify the Minimum Cost bit of the TOS field.

DSCPEnter the DSCP value. This item only appears when “TOS” is set to “DSCP”.

The SIP setup menu is used to connect with an IP phone, etc. using the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol).

Basic Setup

SIP Server ModeAllows you to select whether you use a SIP server or not.On: Enables use of the SIP server.Off: Disables use of the SIP server.

Transport ProtocolAllows you to select the protocol to be used for SIP.TCP: Uses TCP (Transmission Control

Protocol).UDP: Uses UDP (User Datagram Protocol).

This is the factory default setting.

Port NumberEnter the port number to be used for SIP.

SIP DomainEnter the SIP domain name.

Registered User NameEnter the user name for the terminal to be registered to the SIP server (up to 39 characters).

PasswordSet the password for the terminal to be registered to the SIP server (up to 39 characters).

SIP Server AddressEnter the address of the SIP server.

SIP Server PortEnter the port number used for communication with the SIP server.

SIP Setup Menu

SIP

78 Registering Local Information

Page 79: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

The ISDN setup menu is used to set up ISDN lines.

Basic Setup

Country/RegionAllows you to select the country or region where you are using the Communication System.

ProtocolAllows you to select the protocol of the ISDN lines to be used. You can select National ISDN, Japan (NTT), Euro ISDN, Euro ISDN (France), 5ESS (P-P), or DMS-100, depending on the interface that you are using.

For customers in the USA and Canada, see “SPID Settings for Customers in the USA and Canada” on page 79.

Telephone NumberEnter the area code and local number in the text boxes corresponding to the port numbers on the ISDN unit.The text boxes correspond to the port numbers on the ISDN unit in the following way.A1: Port 1 on the ISDN unit.A2: Port 1 on the ISDN unit.B1: Port 2 on the ISDN unit.B2: Port 2 on the ISDN unit.C1: Port 3 on the ISDN unit.C2: Port 3 on the ISDN unit.

Area CodeEnter the area code of the ISDN line to be used. Do not enter the first 0 of the area code.

Local NumberEnter the line number (local number) of the ISDN line to be used.

• When you select an empty field and then press the ENTER button of the Remote

Commander, the setting of the previous field is copied into the selected field.

• When using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit, selecting the ISDN3 button displays the D1 to F2 text boxes. Fill in the D1 to F2 text boxes according to the lines that you are using.

Sub AddressThe A1 to C2 (or A1 to F2) fields appear.

Sub AddressEnter sub-addresses when registering them. Sub-addresses can only be composed of numbers.

SPIDThe SPID (Service Profile Identifier) pages are used only for customers in the USA and Canada.

For details, see “SPID Settings for Customers in the USA and Canada” on page 79.

SPIDThe A1 to C2 (or A1 to F2) fields appear.Enter SPID (Service Profile Identifier).

Auto SPIDWhen you select “Auto SPID”, you can automatically set up the Area Code and Local Number on the Telephone Number page and SPID items.

If you connect to an ISDN switch type, configuration of SPID (Service Profile Identifier) is required. If “Auto SPID” is not available in your area, set up SPID manually using the ISDN setup menu.

1 Open the Basic Setup page of the ISDN setup menu.

ISDN Setup Menu

Notes

ISDN1

ISDN2

SPID Settings for Customers in the USA and Canada

ISDN4

ISDN5

79Registering Local Information

Page 80: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

2 Enter the country code in the Country/Region Code text box depending on the network switch type you are using.

AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN), NTI DMS-100 (National ISDN): Enter “1”.

AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom ISDN): Enter “1*12”.

NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN): Enter “1*11”.

3 Open the Telephone Number page to enter the LDN (Local Directory Number) in the Local Number text boxes. When you use the AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom ISDN) switch type

Enter the same LDNs in the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the number of lines you use) text boxes.

When you use the NTI DMS-100 (National ISDN) or NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN) switch typeEnter the different LDNs in the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the number of lines you use) text boxes. These switch types are given a separate number for each channel.

When you use the AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN) switch typeYou may enter the same or different numbers in two channels.

4 Open the SPID page (ID page) to enter the SPID.The SPID is generally comprised of 12 digits, including a 7 digit LDN (Local Directory Number). Be sure to enter the different SPID number in each of the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the number of lines you use) text boxes if you have entered the separate LDNs in the Local Number text boxes for each channel in step 3.

For the AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN) switch typeEnter the SPID in the A1 text box only.

For the NTI DMS-100 (National ISDN), NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN), AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN) switch typeEnter the different SPID numbers in the A1 and A2 text boxes.

For the AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom ISDN) switch typeYou do not need to set up the SPID, then no entry in the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the number of lines you use) is required.

5 After the settings are completed, select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.

The Annotation setup menu is used for the annotation function allowing you to write letters or graphics on the screen using a pen tablet.

Annotation

EnableAllows you to select whether the annotation function is enabled.On: Enables the annotation function.Off: Disables the annotation function.

ColorAllows you to select the color of the letters or graphics written on the screen with a pen tablet.You can select from among “Black”, “Red”, “Blue”, “Green”, “Yellow”, “Orange”, “Purple” and “White”.

Line DensityAllows you to select the density of the line written on the screen with a pen tablet.You can select from among “Thick”, “Medium” and “Thin”.

Annotation Setup Menu

Annotation

80 Registering Local Information

Page 81: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Camera

Fade InAllows you to select whether to use the fade-in function when the camera moves to the preset position. The picture in the preset position fades in on a monitor screen.On: Enables the fade-in function.Off: Disables the fade-in function.

Second Camera InputAllows you to select the input connector on the Communication System to which the second camera is connected.RGB: Connects the second camera to the

RGB IN connector.YPbPr: Connects the second camera to the

VIDEO IN YPbPr jacks.S-VIDEO: Connects the second camera to

the S VIDEO IN connector.

Device Setup

Terminal NameInput the local terminal name transmitted to a remote party (up to 30 characters).

Standby ModeAllows you to select whether the Communication System enters standby mode if it is idle for a specified period of time.On: Allows the System to go on standby.Off: Does not allow the System to go on

standby.

Standby TimeSpecify the time the system must remain idle before entering the standby mode. This time can be set between 1 and 99 minutes.

For details on the standby mode, see “Standby Mode Function” on page 41.

Last Number RegistrationAllows you to select whether to register the remote party in the Phone Book after the communication ends.Off: The registration of the remote party

does not take place.On: If the remote party is not registered in

the Phone Book, the message “Register this participant in the list?” appears on the monitor screen when communication ends. When you select “OK”, the List Edit menu opens.

Control by Far EndWhen “Far End Camera Control” is set to “On” in the Communication setup menu, you can temporarily reject the camera control command transmitted by the remote party.On: Accepts the camera control command.Off: Rejects the camera control command.

LanguageAllows you to select the menu and display language used by the system. You can select from the following languages: English, French, German, Japanese, Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic, Thai, Norwegian, Turkish, Welsh, Czech and Hungarian.

System LED BrightnessAllows you to select the LED brightness level of the Communication System.You can select from among “Bright”, “Off” and “Dark”.

Camera LED BrightnessAllows you to select the LED brightness level of the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit connected.You can select from among “Bright”, “Off” and “Dark”.

RF Remote Control ReceptionAllows you to select the receiver of the RF signal from the supplied PCS-RF1 Remote Commander.System: Receives the RF signal with the

receiver on the Communication System.

Camera Setup Menu

General Setup Menu

Camera

General1

81Registering Local Information

Page 82: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Camera: Receives the RF signal with the receiver on the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit.

Clock Set

NTPAllows you to select whether to obtain clock information from the server with NTP.On: Obtains clock information from the

server.Off: Does not obtain clock information from

the server.

Primary NTP ServerEnter the address of the primary NTP server from which the clock information is obtained.

Secondary NTP ServerEnter the address of the secondary NTP server from which the clock information is obtained.

Time ZoneAllows you to select the country or region where you are using the Communication System.

Clock Display PatternAllows you to select the display pattern of the clock. You can select from among “Year/Month/Day”, “Month/Day/Year”, “Day/Month/Year”, “Year-Month-Day” and “Day.Month.Year”.

DateEnter the current date (year/month/day).

TimeSet the current clock.

Time UpdateSelecting “Execute” and pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander updates the clock setting when “NTP” is set to “On”.

Menu ScreensAllows you to select whether to display the items of the Tools and Setup menus.

Display Time in CommunicationOff: Displays neither the elapsed nor current

time during communication.Time Display: Displays the elapsed time

during communication.Current Time: Displays the current time

during communication.

Display Terminal NameOff: Does not display the connected

terminal names.Always show: Always displays the

connected terminal names.Show temporarily: Displays the connected

terminal names for a brief moment.

GuideOn: Displays the instruction that guides the

operation.Off: Does not display the instructions.

Display IndicatorOn: Displays the indicators such as

“Memory Stick” and tablet.Off: Does not display the indicators.

Communication Mode DisplayOn: Displays the communication mode

when the system is connected to the remote site.

Off: Does not display the communication mode when the system is connected to the remote site.

Display On-Screen KeyboardOn: Displays the on-screen keyboard.Off: Does not display the on-screen

keyboard.

For details on the on-screen keyboard, see “Entering Characters Using the On-Screen Keyboard” on page 58.

Menu TransparencyAllows you to select the degree of transparency of the superimposed menu display over the background picture. You

General2

General3

82 Registering Local Information

Page 83: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

can select from among “High”, “Medium” and “Low”.

Function Keys in CommunicationAllows you to switch the picture with one press of a button on the Remote Commander.You can set the function to be assigned to each of the F1 to F4 (function) buttons.

You cannot set “Function Keys in Communication” during communication. Set this item before starting communication.

F1Allows you to select the video input switched by pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander. You can select from among “Far/Near”, “Camera”, “S-VIDEO”, “RGB”, “YPbPr” and “No Operation”.This item is preset to “Far/Near” at the factory. This setting allows you to switch the cameras to be controlled between the local and remote sites during communication by pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander.

Even if “F1” is set to any option other than “Far/Near”, “F1” is fixed to “Far/Near” while the Video Input or Layout menu is displayed on the screen. In some other cases, the function of the F1 to F4 buttons may be fixed regardless of the setting for practical convenience, in which case the functions of the button are shown in the instruction display.

F2Allows you to select the video input switched by pressing the F2 button on the Remote Commander. You can select from among “Camera”, “S-VIDEO”, “RGB”, “YPbPr” and “No Operation”.

F3Allows you to select the video input switched by pressing the F3 button on the Remote Commander. You can select from

among “Camera”, “S-VIDEO”, “RGB”, “YPbPr”, “Zoom (RGB)” and “No Operation”.When “Zoom (RGB)” is selected, a 4:3 aspect ratio picture will be enlarged.

F4Allows you to select the video input switched by pressing the F4 button on the Remote Commander. You can select from among “Camera”, “S-VIDEO”, “RGB”, “YPbPr” and “No Operation”.

Home Menu1Allows you to select the items that show or hide in/from the Home menu.

Some items may not be set during communication.

Clock DisplayOn: Allows display of the current time in the

Home menu.Off: Does not display the current time.

Local Terminal NameOn: Displays the local terminal name in the

Home menu.Off: Does not display the local terminal

name.

Number DisplayAllows you to select the identification of the local system, such as the IP address and user name, to be displayed in the Home menu.SIP:User Name: Displays the user name

registered in the SIP server.SIP:Address: Displays the SIP address.GK:User Alias: Displays the user name

registered in the gatekeeper when you use the gatekeeper.

GK:User Number: Displays the user number registered in the gatekeeper when you use the gatekeeper.

NAT:Address: Displays the NAT address when you connect the system to a network using NAT.

Note

Note

General4

Home Menu Setup Menu

Note

Home Menu1

83Registering Local Information

Page 84: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

IP: Address: Displays the IP address.No display: Does not display any

identification, such as the IP and user name, for the system.

Terminal StatusOn: Displays the local terminal status in the

Home menu.Off: Does not display the local terminal

status.

Warning MessagesOn: Displays a warning message in the

Home menu when an abnormality occurs.

Off: Does not display a warning message.

Home Menu2Allows you to select whether to display the menu buttons in the Home menu.

Connect Button DisplaySelect the buttons for connection to be displayed in the Home menu.Simple: Displays “Connect” button only.Individual: Selects whether to display

“Phone Book”, “History” or “Detailed Dial” depending on the setting of each button.

Off: Does not display the buttons for connection.

Phone Book ButtonOn: Displays “Phone Book”.Off: Does not display “Phone Book”.

History ButtonOn: Displays “History”.Off: Does not display “History”.

Detailed Dial ButtonOn: Displays “Detailed Dial”.Off: Does not display “Detailed Dial”.

Camera ButtonOn: Displays “Camera”.Off: Does not display “Camera”.

Tools ButtonOff: Does not display “Tools”.On: Displays “Tools”.

One-Touch DialOn: Displays the one-touch dial buttons.Off: Does not display the one-touch dial

buttons.

Direct DialOff: Does not display “Dial” and the text

box for direct dialing.On: Displays “Dial” and the text box for

direct dialing.

Home Menu3Allows you to select whether to display the indicators (status information) in the Home menu.

Video Input DisplayOn: Displays the current video input name.Off: Does not display the current video input

name.

Audio Input DisplayOn: Displays the current audio input.Off: Does not display the current audio

input.

Audio Level MeterOn: Displays the current audio input level.Off: Does not display the current audio input

level.

VolumeOn: Displays the volume meter for a certain

duration when the volume is adjusted.Off: Does not display the volume meter.

LAN StatusOn: Displays the current status of LAN

connection.Off: Does not display the current status of

LAN connection.

ISDN StatusOn: Displays the currently used ISDN unit

port.Off: Does not display the currently used

ISDN unit port.

Home Menu2

Home Menu3

84 Registering Local Information

Page 85: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

The Administrator setup menu is used for the system administrators. If you have set the password for each menu, you need to enter it when accessing the setup menus or Phone Book to change the items. Entering the password is also required to access the Administrator setup menu.

Password

Administrator PasswordSet the system administrator password (up to 8 characters). This allows the system administrator to modify the Setup and Phone Book items.

• Be aware that setting other passwords but leaving “Administrator Password” blank allows for modification and connection without password input.

• Make sure to write down “Administrator Password”. If you should forget “Administrator Password”, consult your Sony dealer. In this case, the memory of the Communication System is initialized before repair, and the data in the Phone Book and History lists, as well as various setting data, are erased.

Phone Book Modification PasswordSet the password used to modify the Phone Book (up to 8 characters).

Save Settings PasswordSet the password used to save settings (up to 8 characters).

Remote Access PasswordSet the password to access the system through a Web browser (up to 8 characters).

Streaming Broadcast PasswordSet the password used when a remote party receives streaming video and audio broadcast by the local party (up to 8 characters).

Setup Password1Allows you to select whether to require “Save Settings Password” when saving each setting.

Line InterfaceEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Line Interface settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Line Interface settings.

DialEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Dial setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Dial setup settings.

AnswerEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Answer setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Answer setup settings.

MultipointEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Multipoint settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Multipoint settings.

IP ModeEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the IP Mode settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the IP Mode settings.

SIP ModeEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the SIP Mode settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the SIP Mode settings.

ISDN ModeEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the ISDN Mode settings.

Administrator Setup Menu

Notes

Administrator1

Administrator2

85Registering Local Information

Page 86: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the ISDN Mode settings.

Setup Password2

AudioEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Audio setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Audio setup settings.

VideoEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Video setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Video setup settings.

LANEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the LAN setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the LAN setup settings.

QoSEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the QoS setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the QoS setup settings.

TOSEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the TOS setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the TOS setup settings.

SIPEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the SIP setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the SIP setup settings.

ISDNEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the ISDN setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the ISDN setup settings.

Setup Password3

GeneralEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the General setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the General setup settings.

Home MenuEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Home Menu setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Home Menu setup settings.

AdministratorEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Administrator setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Administrator setup settings.

AnnotationEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Annotation setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Annotation setup settings.

CameraEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Camera setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Camera setup settings.

EncryptionEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Encryption setup settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Encryption setup settings.

Administrator3 Administrator4

86 Registering Local Information

Page 87: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Shared Phone BookEnabled: Requires “Save Settings

Password” when saving the Shared Phone Book settings.

Disabled: Does not require the password when saving the Shared Phone Book settings.

Streaming/Recording

StreamingSelect whether to enable the streaming broadcast.Enabled: Permits the streaming broadcast.Disabled: Does not permit the streaming

broadcast of a videoconference.

RecordingSelect whether to enable the recording of video and audio to a “Memory Stick.”Enabled: Permits the recording.Disabled: Does not permit the recording.

VideoSelect a bit rate for streaming and recording video.Off: Disables the streaming and recording of

video.64Kbps: Streams and records video at

64 Kbps.128Kbps: Streams and records video at

128 Kbps.384Kbps: Streams and records video at

384 Kbps.512Kbps: Streams and records video at

512 Kbps.

When “Off” is selected, only audio can be streamed and recorded.

Multicast AddressEnter the multicast address for streaming broadcasts.

You can enter the unicast address in this menu. If you set the unicast address, enter two or more different numbers in “Audio Port Number” and “Video Port Number” for streaming broadcasts.

Audio Port NumberEnter the audio port number for streaming broadcasts.

Video Port NumberEnter the video port number for streaming broadcasts.

HOPEnter a number from 0 to 255 as the HOP for streaming broadcasts.

Access Permit

Web MonitorAllows you to permit the monitoring communication status through a Web browser (automatic update of JPEG images).On: Permits monitoring with a Web

browser.Off: Does not permit monitoring with a Web

browser.

Web AccessSelect whether to permit access to the Communication System via a Web browser.Enabled: Permits access via a Web browser.Disabled: Prohibits access via a Web

browser.

Telnet AccessSelect whether to permit access to the Communication System via Telnet.Enabled: Permits access via Telnet.Disabled: Prohibits access via Telnet.

SSH AccessAllows you to select whether to permit access to the Communication System via SSH (Secure Shell).Enabled: Permits access via SSH.Disabled: Prohibits acces via SSH

Image Flip for First CameraAllows you to select whether to rotate the camera image 180 degrees when the first camera is installed on a ceiling.Flip Vertical: Rotates the image 180

degrees.Off: Does not rotate the image 180 degrees.

Note

Note

Administrator5

Administrator6

87Registering Local Information

Page 88: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Image Flip for Second CameraAllows you to select whether to rotate the camera image 180 degrees when the second camera is installed on a ceiling.Flip Vertical: Rotates the image 180

degrees.Off: Does not rotate the image 180 degrees.

• The “Image Flip” function will be enabled after system rebooting.

• The “Image Flip” function cannot be used with the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit.

Other

Use HistorySelect whether to display the history lists in order to use for dialing, etc.On: Displays the history lists.Off: Does not display the history lists.

Save SetupSaves the data for each setting to a “Memory Stick”. The data for each setting saved on the “Memory Stick” is overwritten.

Phone Book and History data are not saved.

Load SetupLoads the data for each setting from a “Memory Stick”. The data for each setting saved on the System is overwritten.

When saving and loading settings, make sure that the version of the system from which the data was originally saved is the same as the version of the local system. If the versions differ, the data may not be properly recognized.

AMX Device DiscoverySelect whether to export AMX Device Discovery information onto the network. Off: Disables this function.On: Enables this function.When the AMX system is connected to the Communication System via serial connection, AMX Device Discovery information is output via that serial connection.

AMX systems are external control devices that can be used to control the Communication System. When the AMX system receives Device Discovery information from the Communication System, the System automatically falls under the control of the AMX system.

HOPEnter a number from 0 to 255 as the HOP Display Terminal Name.

1080i ModeAllows you to select whether to transmit or receive the picture in 1080i mode.Transmission and reception of the picture in 1080i mode is available only for connection via LAN.You can connect to a remote party in 1080i mode only by using the button in the Home menu.Off: Does not use 1080i video format.On: Uses 1080i video format. When set to

“On”, the system reboots automatically.

• The 1080i Mode is not available for S video or RGB input signal.

• When “1080i Mode” is set to “On”, a remote party must enable communication in 1080i video format.

• When “1080i Mode” is set to “On”, presentation and PinP, PandP and Side by Side displays are not available.

• When “1080i Mode” is set to “On”, the Annotation function is not available.

• When “1080i Mode” is set to “On”, the Web Access function is not available even if “Web Access” is set to “Enabled” in the Administrator setup menu.

Auto RestoreAllows you to select whether to automatically turn on the Communication System if an power interruption occurs and is then restored.On: Enables the Auto Restore function.Off: Disables the Auto Restore function.

Internet ProtocolIPv4: Uses the internet protocol version 4

(IPv4) that is commonly used.

Notes

Note

Note

Administrator7

Notes

88 Registering Local Information

Page 89: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

IPv6: Uses the next-generation internet protocol version 6 (IPv6).

• The setting of “Internet Protocol” is common to both LAN1 and LAN2.

• When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv6”, some of the functions of this system are restricted, and some of the Administrator setup menu are not displayed.

For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of IPv6” on page 96.

Phone Book

Save Phone BookAllows you to save the data in the Phone Book on a “Memory Stick”. The data already stored on the “Memory Stick” is overwritten.

Load Phone BookAllows you to load the data in the Phone Book from a “Memory Stick.” The data already stored in the Phone Book is overwritten.

When loading Phone Book data, make sure that the version of the system from which the data was originally saved is the same as the version of the local system. If the versions differ, the data may not be properly recognized.

Clear Phone BookAllows you to delete a Phone Book on the system.

Auto DialingAllows you to select whether to automatically dial a specified remote party in the Private Phone Book created in a “Memory Stick”, when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.On: Enables the Auto Dialing function.Off: Disables the Auto Dialing function.

For details, see “To dial a specified remote party in a Private Phone Book automatically” on page 128.

Create Private Phone BookAllows you to create an empty folder and file for a Private Phone Book on a “Memory Stick” inserted into the system.

For details, see “Creating a Private Phone Book” on page 126.

Delete Private Phone BookAllows you to delete the Private Phone Book on a “Memory Stick” inserted into the system.

Copy to Private Phone BookAllows you to copy the entire contents of the Phone Book to a Private Phone Book on a “Memory Stick” inserted into the system.

The Encryption setup menu is used to connect to a remote party using the encryption function.The encryption function allows you to hold a strictly confidential connection.

For details on an encrypted connection, see Chapter 5.

When an encrypted connection is made, the maximum bandwidth to be used is restricted to 6 Mbps.

Encryption

Encryption ModeSelect whether you use the encryption feature.Off: Disables use of the encryption feature.Connect Priority: Connects with the

encryption feature to a remote party with standard encrypted connection enabled. Connects without the encryption feature to a remote party with standard encrypted connection disabled or with the encryption feature set to off.

Encrypt Priority: Connects only to a remote party with standard encrypted connection enabled.

Notes

Note

Administrator8

Encryption Setup Menu

Note

Encryption

89Registering Local Information

Page 90: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This menu is used to configure the settings when using the Shared Phone Book located on the server.

For details on the Shared Phone Book, see “Using the Shared Phone Book” on page 128.

Shared Phone Book

SPB ModeSelects whether to use the server managing the Shared Phone Book.On: Enables use of the server managing the

Shared Phone Book.Off: Disables use of the server managing the

Shared Phone Book.

SPB Server AddressEnter the IP address for the server managing the Shared Phone Book.

SPB Server PasswordEnter the password for the server managing the Shared Phone Book.

Shared Phone Book Setup Menu

Shared Phone Book

90 Registering Local Information

Page 91: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Displaying the Machine StatusThe Machine Status menu allows display of the versions, communication mode, line connection quality, etc. of the Communication System and the connected equipment.

1 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander or use the V, v, B or b button to select “Tools”, then press the ENTER button.The Tools menu appears,

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Machine Status”, then press the ENTER button.The Machine Status menu appears.

Information screens enabled for display by the Machine Status menuMachine Information (see page 93)Peripheral Status (see page 93)Communication Mode Status (see page 94)LAN Line Status (see page 94)Network Routing Check (see page 105)

Displaying the Machine Status Menu

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Machine Status

Back to Tools

Home Machine Information

Peripheral Status

Communication Mode Status

LAN Line Status

Network Routing Check

91Displaying the Machine Status

Page 92: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the information to be displayed, then press the ENTER button.The selected display appears.

92 Displaying the Machine Status

Page 93: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

The Machine Information menu shows the versions of the HD Visual Communication System and the connected equipment for exclusive use, installed software versions, etc.

Host VersionDisplays the software version of the HD Visual Communication System.

Software OptionDisplays the optional software installed.None: No software is installed.Presentation: The PCSA-DSG80 HD Data

Solution software is installed.Multipoint: The PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU

software is installed.

Option I/FDisplays the optional connected equipment.None: No optional equipment is connected.ISDN (B768): The PCSA-B768S ISDN

Unit is connected.ISDN (B384): The PCSA-B384S ISDN

Unit is connected.Tablet: Pen tablet (Bamboo MTE-450

manufactured by Wacom Co., Ltd.) is connected.

Host NameDisplays the host name.

IP AddressDisplays the IP address for LAN1.

IP Address (LAN2)Displays the IP address for LAN2.

MAC AddressDisplays the MAC address for LAN1.

MAC Address (LAN2)Displays the MAC address for LAN2.

Serial NumberDisplays the serial number.

Machine versionSelecting “Next” in the Machine Information menu shows the codec version, etc.

Video InputDisplays the input video name.

Audio Input (MIC)Displays microphone input name.

Audio Input (AUX)Displays the external audio input name.

Video OutputDisplays the On/Off setting of “1080i Mode” and the 50 Hz/60 Hz setting of “Frequency”.

Audio OutputDisplays the audio output equipped with this system.

LAN Mode (LAN1)Displays the LAN Mode for LAN1.

LAN Mode (LAN2)Displays the LAN Mode for LAN2.

GatekeeperDisplays the status of registration to gatekeeper with the following messages:Gatekeeper Requested, Gatekeeper Confirmed, Gatekeeper Reject, Registration Requested, Registration Confirmed, Registration Failed, Registration Rejected, Registration Timeout, Unregistration Requested and Unregistration Confirmed.

First CameraDisplays the name of the first camera.

Second CameraDisplays the name of the second camera.

Machine Information

Peripheral Status

93Displaying the Machine Status

Page 94: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The Communication Mode Status menu shows the status of current communication when communication is in progress, and the status of previous communications when communication is not in progress.The ISDN Line Status, LAN Line Status or LAN Connection Status will also be displayed depending on the line interface used.

Communication Mode StatusThe current communication status will be displayed. When two or more points are connected to the system, selecting “Next” in the lower part of the page displays the next page.For the items described with both “(Encode)” and “(Decode)”, the descriptions under “(Encode)” show the setting status of the local system and those under “(Decode)” show the status of the receiving.

Far End Terminal NameDisplays the terminal name of a remote party.

Remote AddressDisplays the address of a remote party.

Audio ModeDisplays the current audio encoding format.

Video ModeDisplays the current video encoding format.

The audio encoding and video encoding formats used for communication with a remote party may differ from the settings in this menu, depending on the status of the system on the remote site.

Frame RateDisplays the maximum frame rate of motion pictures.

RateDisplays in real time the number of connected lines and their transfer rates.

Line I/FDisplays the line interface being used.

Camera ControlDisplays whether the unit is ready to operate both cameras.

H239Displays whether the unit is ready to use the H.239 presentation mode.

Check CodeDisplays the encryption check code.

The LAN line status will be displayed on one page for each point connected to the system. The connected point is shown at the upper left corner of each page. Selecting “Next” in the lower part of the page displays the next page.

Bit rate - EncodeDisplays by category (audio, video and H.239 (presentation)) the transfer rates for sending data.

Bit rate - DecodeDisplays by category (audio, video and H.239 (presentation)) the transfer rates for receiving data.

Number of lost packetsDisplays by category (audio, video and H.239 (presentation)) the number of packets lost during transfer on the network.

Number of recovered packetsDisplays by category (audio, video and H.239 (presentation)) the number of lost packets that were recovered with the system’s QoS function.

Number of received packetsDisplays by category (audio, video and H.239 (presentation)) the number of packets received during communication.

Communication Mode Status

Note

LAN Line Status

94 Displaying the Machine Status

Page 95: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

The Network Routing Check menu is used to check the network routing, and it shows the checking results.You can start the network routing check by selecting “Start Measurement” in the lower part of the menu.

For details, see “About the Network Routing Check” on page 105.

IP address of remote siteEnter the IP address of the remote terminal you want to check.

Line I/FLAN1: Select to perform the routing check

for the network connected to the 1 connector.

LAN2: Select to perform the routing check for the network connected to the 2 connector.

GatewayDisplays the results of check for the default gateway.

pingDisplays the results of check for reachability, packet loss, RTT (Round-Trip Time) and H.323 (H.323 communication availability).

tracerouteDisplays the results of check for HOP (number of routers passed through to reach the remote site) and total RTT.

Start MeasurementSelect this button to start a network routing check.

PreviousSelect this button to restore the Machine Status menu.

Restrictions on the Use of LAN2

When you use two LAN connections, use the 1 (LAN1) connector to connect a private network in your company and the

2 (LAN2) connector to connect to an intranet outside your company.The following functions of the system are restricted when using the 2 (LAN2) connector.

In the event of using the 1 (LAN1) connector to connect to an intranet outside your company, make sure to set “Web Access”, “Telnet Access” and “SSH Access” to “Disabled” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu (page 87).

Items that cannot be set with LAN2• NAT Mode• Gatekeeper• SNMP Mode• SIP• NTP • Shared Phone Book• AMX Device Discovery• H.460• DNS • Streaming• IPv6• Web Access, Telnet Access, SSH Access

Item that can be set with either LAN1 or LAN2• PPPoE

Items to be set with LAN1 or LAN2 individually• DHCP Mode• IP Address• Network Mask• Gateway Address• LAN Mode

Network Routing Check

Note

95Restrictions on the Use of LAN2

Page 96: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Items to be set with LAN1 and LAN2 commonly• Used Port Number (TCP, UDP) • QoS • TOS• Auto Answer• Reject Answer

Do not set the same subnet for the LAN1 and LAN2 connections.

Restrictions on the Use of IPv6

The functions of the system are restricted as follows when using the Internet Protocol IPv6.

Unusable functions with IPv6• SNMP Mode• NTP• Shared Phone Book • TOS• Network Routing Check• AMX Device Discovery• LAN2

Note

96 Restrictions on the Use of IPv6

Page 97: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Setting Up the Network ConfigurationsThis section describes how to set up the network configurations for use with various networks.

For details on the LAN setup menu, see “LAN Setup Menu” (page 74).

For details on configurations, consult with the system administrator.

Configuration example

Set “DHCP Mode” to “Auto” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu.

The setting has been configured properly if the IP address appears in the Home menu.

To connect to a remote party

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.

LAN Connection via DHCP (LAN1/LAN2)

/ /

LAN (A) LAN (B)

DHCP Server 1

Setup Basic SetupLAN

Host Name

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

LAN Mode

Auto

CancelSave

Auto

LAN1

97Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 98: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Configuration example

Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”, and “Gateway Address”.

The setting has been configured properly if the correct IP address appears in the Home menu.

To connect to a remote party

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.

LAN Connection through a Router (LAN1/LAN2)

/

/

LAN (A) LAN (B)

192.100.10.1

Virtual Private Network (VPN) 192.100.20.1

Router

192.100.10.10 192.100.20.20

Router

Setup Basic SetupLAN

Host Name

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

LAN Mode Auto

Off

Sony

192.100. 10. 10

255.255.255. 0

192.100. 10. 1

CancelSave

LAN1

98 Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 99: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

Configuration example

1 Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”, and “Gateway Address”.

2 Set “Gatekeeper Mode” to “On” under the Gatekeeper page of the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “Gatekeeper Address”, “User Alias”, and “User Number”.

The IP address registered is displayed in the Home menu.

LAN Connection through a Gatekeeper (LAN1 Only)

/

/

User number: 100

LAN (B)

192.100.10.10

User alias: PCS-A

User number: 200

LAN (A)

192.100.10.1

192.100.20.20

Gatekeeper 192.100.10.20

192.100.20.1

User alias: PCS-B

Router Router

Setup Basic SetupLAN

Host Name

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

LAN Mode Auto

Off

Sony

192.100. 10. 10

255.255.255. 0

192.100. 10. 1

CancelSave

LAN1

Setup GatekeeperLAN

Gatekeeper Mode

Gatekeeper Address

User Alias

User Number

H.460

192.100. 10. 20

On

CancelSave

PCS-A

100

Off

LAN4

99Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 100: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To connect to a remote party

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the user name or user number set by the remote party, and dial.

Connection using NAT allows one IP address to be shared by several computers on the same LAN. This section describes how to set up visual communication in NAT and global IP environments.

Configuration example

1 Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”, and “Gateway Address”.

2 Set “NAT Mode” to “On” in the NAT Setup page of the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate IP address in “WAN IP Address”.

LAN Connection through NAT (LAN1 Only)

/

/

Internet

210.10.10.1

210.20.20.2(Global address)

192.100.10.10

192.100.10.1 210.20.20.1

Router Router

Setup Basic SetupLAN

Host Name

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

LAN Mode Auto

Off

Sony

192.100. 10. 10

255.255.255. 0

192.100. 10. 1

CancelSave

LAN1

100 Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 101: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

The setting has been configured properly if the correct WAN IP address appears in the Home menu.To display the NAT address in the Home menu, you must set “Number Display” to “NAT:Address” in the Home Menu1 page of the Home Menu setup menu (page 83).

3 Remote parties must configure the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu in the same way.

Remote parties do not need to configure the settings in the NAT Setup page of the LAN setup menu as they are not in a NAT environment.

To connect to a remote party

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.

When using the terminal in the NAT environment, you can connect to a remote party (global IP), but for a remote party to connect to you, you must configure your router settings. For details on router settings, consult with the system administrator.

You can use H.460 to traverse firewalls and connect with the terminals on other networks.

Note

Note

Setup NAT SetupLAN

5/11/2008 13:00IP:192.168.0.11

NAT Mode

WAN IP Address

On

210. 10. 10. 1

Cancel Save

LAN3

LAN Connection with H.460 Firewall Traversal (LAN1 Only)

101Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 102: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Configuration example

1 Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”, and “Gateway Address”.

2 Set “H.460” to “On” under the Gatekeeper page of the LAN setup menu. Set “Gatekeeper Mode” to “On” and enter the appropriate value for “Gatekeeper Address”.

The IP address registered is displayed in the Home menu.

To conduct a video conference

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/ OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

210.20.20.10(Global address)

192.100.10.1

Traversal server

Router Router

Internet

192.200.20.1

192.100.10.10User Alias: PCS-AUser Number: 100

192.200.20.10

Setup Basic SetupLAN

Host Name

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Network Mask

Gateway Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

LAN Mode Auto

Off

Sony

192.100. 10. 10

255.255.255. 0

192.100. 10. 1

CancelSave

LAN1

Setup GatekeeperLAN

Gatekeeper Mode

Gatekeeper Address

User Alias

User Number

H.460

210. 20. 20. 10

On

CancelSave

PCS-A

100

On

LAN 4

102 Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 103: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

When using PPPoE, you can connect via LAN without a router.A modem (using bridge mode) is required when using FLET’S ADSL.

Configuration example

1 Set “PPPoE” to “LAN1” or “LAN2” under the PPPoE page in the LAN setup menu, and enter the PPPoE user name and PPPoE password given to you by the provider.

2 If you have a fixed IP from the provider, set “Fixed IP for PPPoE” to “On”, and enter your fixed IP address for PPPoE in “Fixed IP Address for PPPoE” under the PPPoE page in the LAN setup menu.

The setting has been configured properly if the correct IP address appears in the Home menu.

If the fixed DNS server address is specified by the provider, set “DNS” to “Specify”, and enter the specific addresses in “Primary DNS” and “Secondary DNS”.

3 Remote parties must configure in the same way.

To connect to a remote party

Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.

LAN Connection Using PPPoE (LAN1/LAN2)

Note

/

/

ONU

211.10.10.10

B FLET’S

B FLET’S ONU

210.10.10.10

Local IP network

Internet

Setup PPPoELAN

PPPoE

User Alias

Password

Fixed IP for PPPoE

Fixed IP Address for PPPoE

DNS

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

[email protected]

LAN1

CancelSave

Obtain automatically

abcdefg

On

210. 10. 10. 10

LAN2

103Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 104: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

1 Enter the appropriate numbers for “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the Telephone Number page of the ISDN setup menu.

Do not enter the first 0 of the area code.

For details on the ISDN setup menu, see “ISDN Setup Menu” (page 79).

For details on configurations, consult with the system administrator.

The setting has been configured properly if the correct line number appears in the Home menu.

2 Remote parties must configure in the same way.

When connecting to the ISDN unit, use the ports in ascending order.Yes: 1, 2, 3…No: 1, 6, 5…

To connect to a remote party

Select “ISDN” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s line number, and dial.

For details on how to start a visual communication, see “Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party” (page 106).

ISDN Connections

Note

Note

ISDN2

A1

A2

B3

B2

C1

C2

Auto SPID

CancelSave

Execute

Area Code Local Number

Setup NumberISDN

104 Setting Up the Network Configurations

Page 105: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 2: R

egistration and Setup for S

ystem A

dministrators

About the Network Routing CheckBefore connecting a remote system, you can check the network routing to assure smooth connection with the system.

For the network routing check, knowledge of network is required. Consult your network administrator or Sony dealer.

If you have any questions about the checked result, consult your network administrator or Sony dealer.

To start the network routing check

Open the Network Routing Check menu of the Machine Status menu on the local system that performs the routing check, then set the necessary items on the menu.Select “Start Measurement” to start the network routing check.

For the procedure how to open the Network Routing Check menu, see “Displaying the Machine Status” on page 91.

While the network routing check is being performed, you cannot use any other functions including communication. When the routing check is complete, the checked results are displayed on the Network Routing Check menu.

Note

Network Routing Check

Machine Status > Network Routing Check

LAN1

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

EndStart Measurement

IP Address of Remote Site

Line I/F

Gatewayping

traceroute

ResultResultPacket Loss (%)RTTH.323 CommunicationHOPTotal RTT

105About the Network Routing Check

Page 106: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This chapter describes how to connect to a remote party after the administrator has completed various registrations and settings for the system.The chapter explains a point-to-point communication via a LAN connection, ISDN connection using the optional PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit or SIP.

For use of optional equipment, see Chapter 4.

To conduct an encrypted communication, see Chapter 5.

To conduct a multipoint communication, see Chapter 6.

Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

You can start a communication with a remote party by dialing. Once you have made a connection to the remote party, you can begin talking just as with a normal phone call and start communication.You can call a remote party using the various methods described below. Use any one depending on the settings in the Home menu or connecting status.• To call a remote party by using the Connect menu (page 107)• To call a remote party by entering their address or number directly (Direct

Dial) (page 108)• To call a remote party by using the one-touch dial buttons (page 110)• To call a remote party by using the history list (page 111)• To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book (page 112)• To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book by setting the

necessary items in the Detailed Dial menu (page 114)

1 Turn on the TV monitor.

2 Turn on other equipment you are using for the communication.

3 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.

Chapter 3: Basic Connection

Turning On the Power

106 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 107: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

The indicator on the System starts flashing, then lights in green when the power is on.The Home menu appears on the monitor screen and the picture shot by the local camera also appears.

After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be careful not to catch your finger.

This method is available when the Connect button is displayed in the Home menu.

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Connect” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.The Connect menu appears.

Note

Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu

/

POWER/STANDBY

?/1 (power) indicator

?/1 (power) switch

Connect

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Home

AAA Ready to connect.Ready

Connect button

107Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 108: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select how to call a remote party, then press the ENTER button.The menu screen will change according to the item you select.

Enter Number/Address: The Detailed Dial menu appears on the screen.

For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book” on page 114.

Select from Phone Book: The Phone Book appears on the screen.

For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book” on page 112.

Select from History: The history list appears on the screen.

For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party by Selecting Them in the History List” on page 111.

.

When “Direct Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup menu, the number input box, Dial button, etc. are displayed in the Home menu, allowing you to use the direct dial function.

Calling a Remote Party by Entering Their Address or Number Directly (Direct Dial)

Select from History

Previous

Enter Number/Address

Select from Phone Book

Connect

IP:192.168.0.11 5/11/2008 13:00

DialIP

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Home

AAA Ready to connect.Ready

Line interfaceNumber input box

Dial

108 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 109: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Line I/F” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the line interface to be used, then press the ENTER button.IP: Connects to the system on the remote site via a LAN connected to the

1 (LAN1) connector.ISDN: Connects to the system on the remote site via an ISDN line.TEL: Connects to a phone on the remote site via an ISDN line for a voice

meeting.

• When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup menu, you can select “SIP” from the line interface select box.

• When “Use LAN2” is set to “On”, you can select “IP(2)” from the line interface select box.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the number input box, then press the ENTER button.

4 Enter the remote party’s IP address or line number with the number buttons on the Remote Commander, then press the ENTER button.

The format of the address for a SIP connection is the following:• 4000 (number assigned by the SIP server)• [email protected]• 192.168.1.1 (when the IP address and SIP server are not used)

5 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”, then press the ENTER button. The system begins dialing the IP address or telephone number entered in step 4. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote site is displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.

Notes

Note

Picture on the local site

Picture on the remote site

109Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 110: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote partyWhile “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT ( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

When “One-Touch Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup menu, the one-touch dial buttons are displayed in the Home menu, allowing you to use the one-touch dial function.

For registration of the one-touch dial buttons, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 120.

1 Open the Home menu.

2 Select the one-touch dial button for which the remote party you want to call is registered with one of the F1 to F4 buttons on the Remote Commander.Or select the one-touch dial button you want to call in the Home menu by pressing the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press the ENTER button. Select “Connect” from the displayed submenu with the V, v, B or b button, and press the ENTER button.

The system begins dialing the selected remote party. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen. When the system connects to the remote system, “Session Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote site is displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.

To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote partyWhile “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT ( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

Calling a Remote Party Using the One-Touch Dial Buttons

Detailed Dial

Camera

Tools

History

Phone Book

DialIP

Office EOffice ARoom 201

F2

Room 101

F1 F3 F4

5/11/2008 13:00IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXAAA Ready to connect.Ready

Home

One-touch dial buttons

110 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 111: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “History” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select “Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button to display the Connect menu, then select “Select from History”.The History menu appears.

You can display the History menu by selecting “History” from the Phone Book or Detailed Dial menu.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial (outgoing call history)”, “Answer (incoming call history)” or “Missed Call (incoming call history in absence)”, then press the ENTER button or b button.The selected history list appears.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party you want to call.

4 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v, B or b button, and press the ENTER button.The system begins dialing the selected party. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen. When the system connects to the remote system, “Session

Calling a Remote Party by Selecting Them in the History List

Note

Detailed Dial

History

Phone Book

IP:192.168.0.11

Home

5/11/2008 13:00

Missed Call

Answer

Dial Dial History1 111.111.111.112 2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)

Dial History2 555-555-555 2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)

Dial History3 17.17.17.17 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)

Dial History4 18.18.18.18 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)

Dial History5 19.19.19.19 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)

Dial History6 20.20.20.20 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)

Dial History7 66.66.66.66 2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)

Dial History8 88.88.88.88 2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)

Detailed Dial

History

Phone Book

IP:192.168.0.11

Home

5/11/2008 13:00

Missed Call

Answer

Dial Dial History1 111.111.111.112 2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)

Dial History2 555-555-555 2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)

Dial History3 17.17.17.17 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)

Dial History4 18.18.18.18 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)

Dial History5 19.19.19.19 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)

Dial History6 20.20.20.20 2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)

Dial History7 66.66.66.66 2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)

Dial History8 88.88.88.88 2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)

111Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 112: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote site is displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.

To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote partyWhile “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT ( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

You can select the items below from the submenu:“Cancel”: Cancels selection from the history list.“Edit”: Displays the List Edit menu for registration in the Phone Book.“Delete”: Deletes the selected call from the history list.

For the registration in the Phone Book, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 120.

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone Book” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select “Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button to display the Connect menu, then select “Select from Phone Book”.The Phone Book appears on the monitor screen.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the Group in which the remote party you want to call is registered, then press the ENTER button.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party you want to call.

4 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v, B or b button, and press the ENTER button.

Note

Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book

Office ARoom 102Room 101

Office ERoom 202Room 201

ISDN 98-7654-3210IP 255.255.255.255ISDN 01-2345-6789

ISDN 01-2345-6789IP 123.456.789.012IP 0.0.0.0

Detailed Dial

History

New Entry

Group Edit

Phone Book

Group1

Default Group

Group2

Group3

Group4

Group5

Group6

Group7

Group8

Group9

Home

112 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 113: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

The system begins dialing the selected party. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen. When the system connects to the system on the remote site, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the picture on the remote site is displayed.Now you can start communication with the remote party.

To cancel dialing before connectingWhile “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT ( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To switch the display in the Phone Book between the list and the thumbnailsEach time the F1 button on the Remote Commander is pressed, the display changes between the list and the thumbnails.

To change the order of displayEach time the F2 button on the Remote Commander is pressed, the display changes between the list of remote parties’ names in ascending alphabetical order and that list in descending alphabetical order.

To display the Phone Book during communicationPress the button on the Remote Commander during communication.

To call a remote party registered in the Private Phone Book

1 Insert the “Memory Stick” that contains the Private Phone Book into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.The Phone Book changes to the Private Phone Book.

2 Select “Private Phone Book” in the Home menu, and press the ENTER button.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote party you want to call from the Private Phone Book.

4 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v, B or b button, and press the ENTER button.

Room 101ISDN 01-2345-6789

Detailed Dial

History

New Entry

Group Edit

Phone Book

Default GroupHome

Cancel

Edit

Copy

Delete

Connect

113Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 114: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

If the auto dialing feature of the Private Phone Book is activated, the system begins dialing when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Detailed Dial” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select “Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button to display the Connect menu, then select “Enter Number/Address”.The Detailed Dial menu appears on the screen.

2 Select the line interface to be used for connection.Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Line I/F”, then press the ENTER button. The setting items appear. Press the V, v, B or b button to select the line interface to be used to connect to the remote party, then press the ENTER button.IP: Connects to a remote party via a LAN connected to the 1 (LAN1)

connector.ISDN: Connects to a remote party via an ISDN.ISDN (2B): Connects to the H.221-format system via 2B channels of the

ISDN connection.TEL: Connects to the phone of a remote party to conduct a voice meeting

via the ISDN connection.

• When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup menu, you can select “SIP” from “Line I/F”.

• When “Use LAN2” is set to “On”, you can select “IP(2)” from “Line I/F”.

3 Configure the LAN or ISDN line to be used for connection.When using the LAN1 Enter the IP address of a remote party to connect in the IP text box.

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the IP text box, then press the ENTER button. Next, enter the IP address with the number buttons on the Remote Commander or the on-screen keyboard, and press the ENTER button.

Note

Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book

Notes

History

Detailed Dial

1024kbps

IP

Phone Book

Dial to:

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

1B (64K)Number of Lines

Home

Cancel

114 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 115: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Enter the host name and domain name (ex. host.domain) when using the DNS server, or enter the party’s user name and user number registered in the LAN setup menu on the remote party’s system when using the gatekeeper, then press the ENTER button.

• You can enter a dot (.) with the b or DOT button on the Remote Commander, or “b” or “Dot” on the on-screen keyboard.

• To delete the last entered character, use the BACK SPACE button on the Remote Commander or “Back Space” on the on-screen keyboard.

• To delete the entered IP address, use the RETURN button on the Remote Commander or “Cancel” on the on-screen keyboard.

2 Select the communication bit rate.Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Communication Bit Rate”, then press the ENTER button. Press the V, v, B or b button to select the communication bit rate from the displayed submenu, then press the ENTER button.

When using the ISDN1 Enter the telephone number of a remote party to connect in the A text

box.Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the A text box, then press the ENTER button. Next, enter the telephone number with the number buttons on the Remote Commander or on-screen keyboard, and press the ENTER button.

• Do not enter the prefix number in the telephone number text box, when the prefix setting is on. For details on prefix settings, see “Dial Setup Menu” on page 64.

• Even when you connect multiple ISDN lines (2B (128K) or more number of lines), entering one telephone number of the remote party enables you to connect all the lines used automatically.

• When you select ISDN (2B (128K)), the A1 and A2 text boxes appear. You can enter a separate ISDN line number in each text box. Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander while the A2 text box is selected copies the number entered in the A1 text box to the A2 text box.

• To delete the last entered character, use the BACK SPACE button on the Remote Commander or “Back Space” on the on-screen keyboard.

• To delete the entered ISDN telephone number, use the RETURN button on the Remote Commander or “Cancel” on the on-screen keyboard.

2 Select the number of ISDN lines to use during the call.Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Number of Lines”, then press the ENTER button. Press the V, v, B or b button to select the number of channels to be used when calling a remote party from the displayed items, then press the ENTER button.

Notes

Notes

115Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 116: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers for the ISDN lines usedIf the system of the remote party is not equipped with the bonding function, entering one remote party’s telephone number does not allow automatic connection of multiple ISDN lines used to connect to the remote party. To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers, register the remote party’s telephone numbers for the ISDN lines to be used referring to “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book”(page 120), then connect to the remote party according to the procedure described in “Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book” (page 112).

4 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or use the V, v, B or b button to select “Connect” in the lower part of the menu, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The system begins dialing the IP address or ISDN telephone number entered in step 3. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the picture on the remote site is displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.

To cancel dialing before connectingWhile “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT ( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To save the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number in the Phone BookWhen you enter the IP address or ISDN telephone number, the Save button appears at the lower part of the menu.Select “Save” with the V, v, B or b button, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander. The List Edit menu is displayed. Save the address or number you entered into the Phone Book.

For details on the List Edit menu, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 120.

Redial functionOnce you have input the IP address or ISDN telephone number using the Detailed Dial menu, it will be entered in the text box of the Detailed Dial menu the next time you open the menu.

The redial function is not available: • Once you have turned off the power of the system or set it to standby mode.• When you cancel dialing the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number.

Note

Note

116 Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party

Page 117: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Receiving a Call from a Remote PartyOperations for answering a call differ depending on the setting of the answer mode.

Auto answer modeThe system automatically receives a call from a remote party and you can start connecting. Although no operation is necessary to start, the picture on the local site will be displayed on the remote site screen even if you are not ready to begin.

Manual answer modeWhen there is an incoming call, the Communication System rings. You need to connect the call manually. You can start connecting when you are ready.

• You cannot answer the call unless the power switch on the Communication System is on.

• Make sure that the TV monitor is turned on.

For setting of the answer mode, see “Auto Answer” in the Answer setup menu on page 65.

To answer a call in auto answer mode

When you receive a call, the Communication System rings and the message “Answering...” appears on the monitor screen. The system is automatically connected and the picture of the remote party is displayed on the local monitor screen and the sound is heard. The picture and sound on the local site will be enabled on the remote site at the same time.The message “Session Connected.” appears on the monitor screen.You are now ready to start communication.

Notes

Answering a Call from a Remote Party

Picture on the remote site

Picture on the local site

117Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

Page 118: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

See pages 131 to 141 to adjust the sound and picture during communication.

To receive a call in manual answer mode

When you receive a call, the Communication System rings and the message “Incoming call. Answer?” appears on the monitor screen.

Press V, v, B or b to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button. The system is then connected. Once the connection is made, the picture of the remote party is displayed on the local monitor screen and the sound is heard. The picture and sound on the local site will be enabled on the remote site at the same time.The message “Session Connected.” appears on the monitor screen.You are now ready to start a communication.

See pages 131 to 141 to adjust the sound and picture during communication.

When you do not want to answer the callPress V, v, B or b to select “Cancel”, then press the ENTER button. Ringing stops, and the connection is canceled.

When the system fails to make an ISDN connection

If the system fails to connect to the remote party, the message “Cannot complete connection. (an ISDN cause code and a message are displayed here)” appears on the monitor screen.

For details on ISDN cause codes and messages, see “On-Screen Messages” on page 231.

Note

Note

118 Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

Page 119: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Ending the Connection1 Press the DISCONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.

The message “Disconnect?” appears on the monitor screen.

2 Press the DISCONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander again, or press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button.The system is disconnected.

The power of the Communication System remains on even if the system is disconnected.

To cancel disconnection of the systemSelect “Cancel” with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press the ENTER button.

To register the connected remote party in the Phone Book

You can easily register the remote party who has just disconnected.If you set “Last Number Registration” to “On” on the Device Setup page of the General setup menu, the message “Register this participant in the list?” appears after a communication with an unregistered remote party is finished. When you select “OK”, the List Edit menu appears.

If the “Last Number Registration” is set to “Off”, the message does not appear.

For “Last Number Registration” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on page 81.

Note

Note

119Ending the Connection

Page 120: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

You can register the telephone number or IP address of a remote party in the Phone Book, allowing you to dial the party very easily.Up to 1000 remote parties can be registered in the Phone Book. You can also store a still image such as a participant’s portrait in the index list.You can also create a Private Phone Book on a “Memory Stick” separately from the Phone Book in the Communication System.

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone Book” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select “Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button to display the Connect menu, then select “Select from Phone Book”.The Phone Book opens.

The Phone Book can be displayed by selecting “Phone Book” in the History or Detailed Dial menu.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “New Entry”, then press the ENTER button.The List Edit menu appears.

Registering a New Remote Party

Note

Shared Phone Book

Find Name by First Initial

Detailed Dial

History

New Entry

Group Edit

Phone Book > Default Group

5/11/2008 13:00IP:192.168.0.11

Home Default Group

120 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 121: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

3 Set the items in the List Edit menu.Use the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to select the setup item.To enter the characters, use the number buttons on the Remote Commander or the displayed on-screen keyboard, and press the ENTER button. To select the item, use the V, v, B or b button and press the ENTER button.

IndexEnter the name of a remote party in the Index text box. You can use up to 39 letter and number characters.

Group SelectSelect the group set in the Phone Book.

Dial to:Enter the IP address or line number of a remote party depending on the line interface you select.When you select “IP” from “Line I/F”: Enter the remote party’s IP

address. Enter the host name and domain name (ex. host.domain) when using the DNS server, or enter the party’s user name and user number when using the gatekeeper (page 75).

When you select “ISDN” from “Line I/F”: Enter the remote party’s line number. If you register the sub-address in the Phone Book, enter an asterisk between the line number and sub-address. The sub-address can only be composed of numbers.When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial setup menu (page 64), six line input text boxes, A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 and C2, are displayed. Be sure to enter the remote party’s number to the A1 text box.

When you select “TEL” from “Line I/F”: Enter the telephone number of a remote party. (ex. 0390123456)

When you select “SIP” from “Line I/F”: Enter the address of a remote party or the number assigned by the SIP server.The format of the address is the following:• 4000 (number assigned by the SIP server)• [email protected]• 192.168.1.1 (when the IP address and SIP server are not used)

Phone Book

IP

Group Select

One-Touch Dial Specified

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Dial to:

Index

None Specified

None Specified

IP

1024Kbps

Number of Lines 2B (128K)

CancelSaveMore Options

121Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 122: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Icon/ImageSelect the icon or a still image stored on a “Memory Stick” to be displayed on the Phone Book.

You cannot select a still image unless a “Memory Stick” in which still images are stored is inserted.

One-Touch Dial SpecifiedSelect whether to display the one-touch dial buttons in the Home menu. Assign the F1, F2, F3 or F4 function button on the Remote Commander to each one-touch dial button.

Line I/FSelect the line interface you are using to connect to a remote party. Select from among IP, ISDN, TEL and SIP. Selecting any interface switches the setting items in the List Edit menu.

• When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup menu, you can select “SIP” from “Line I/F”.

• When “Use LAN2” is set to “On”, you can select “IP(2)” from “Line I/F”.

Communication Bit RateSelect the communication bit rate when you select “IP” or “SIP” with “Line I/F”.

Number of LinesSelect the number of ISDN channels to be used when you select “ISDN” with “Line I/F”.

You can select “Number of Lines” only when the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is installed in the Communication System.

Auto DialSet this item only for the Private Phone Book (page 126). Setting “Auto Dial” to “On” allows you to automatically dial one of the lists in the Private Phone Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is registered.

4 Use the V, v, B or b on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The settings are registered in the Phone Book.

When a connection with a remote party not registered in the Phone Book is terminated, you can register this remote party to the Phone Book. In this case, the IP address or line number is shown in “Index” as the name of the remote party. Modify it if necessary.

Note

Notes

Note

Note

122 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 123: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

To connect to the remote party without using bonding

If the system of the remote party is not equipped with the bonding function, entering one telephone number does not allow you to connect all the line numbers used to connect to the remote party. To connect to the remote party by entering all the ISDN line numbers used, you can set the connection without using the bonding function of this system. When you set “More Options Enable” to “On” in the Dial setup menu (page 64), the A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 and C2 text boxes appear in the List Edit menu. Enter all the telephone numbers for the ISDN lines selected by “Number of Lines”.

When you set “Number of Lines” to “2B”, you can connect to the remote party by selecting “ISDN (2B)” from “Line I/F” in the Detailed Dial menu.

To set up more detailed options

When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial setup menu, the More Options button is shown at the lower part of the List Edit menu.Select the More Options button with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander and press the ENTER button to open a menu for more detailed dial settings. You can change the settings of the desired items.

The contents set with the More Options button have priority over those set in the Dial setup menu.

You can edit the telephone number, IP address, name or setting registered in the Phone Book.

1 Open the Phone Book.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party to be modified, then press the ENTER button.The submenu appears.

3 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”, then press the ENTER button.The List Edit menu appears.

Note

Note

Editing the Contents of the Phone Book

Cancel

Delete

Copy

Edit

Connect

123Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 124: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

4 Modify the telephone number, IP address, name or setting.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The modification is completed.

1 Open the Phone Book.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party to be copied, then press the ENTER button.The submenu appears.

3 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Copy”, then press the ENTER button.The items for the selected party are copied, and the name is followed by “–2”. You can use the setting after modifying the necessary items.

1 Open the Phone Book.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party to be deleted from the Phone Book, then press the ENTER button.The submenu appears.

3 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Delete”, then press the ENTER button.The message “Delete Entry?” appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button.The selected party is deleted.

To cancel deletingSelect “Cancel” in step 4, then press the ENTER button.

You can create groups into which the registered remote parties are grouped.

To register a new group

1 Open the Phone Book.

Copying a Registered Party in the Phone Book

Deleting the Registered Remote Party

Creating a Group in the Phone Book (Group Edit)

124 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 125: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Group Edit”, then press the ENTER button.The Phone Book > Group Edit menu appears.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “New Entry”, then press the ENTER button.The group name input menu appears.

4 Enter the group name using the number buttons on the Remote Commander and the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER buttons.You can use the alphabetical letters, numbers and symbols.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The registered group button is displayed.

Phone Book > Group Edit

New Entry

Previous

Phone Book > Group Edit

New Entry

Previous

Group Edit

Cancel

Phone Book > Group Edit

Previous

New Entry

TOKYO TOKYO

125Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 126: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

6 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Previous”, then press the ENTER button.The Phone Book is restored.

To modify the group name

1 Open the Phone Book > Group Edit menu, select the group button you want to modify using the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, and press the ENTER button.The submenu appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”, then press the ENTER button.The group name input menu appears.

3 Modify the group name using the number buttons on the Remote Commander and the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER buttons.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The modified group button is displayed in the Phone Book > Group Edit menu.

• You can operate the following with a submenu in the Group Edit menu.“Cancel”: Cancels selection of the group button.“Delete”: Deletes a group in which no party is registered.

• You cannot delete a group button for which any remote parties are registered.

You can create your own Phone Book (Private Phone Book) on a “Memory Stick”. Once the Private Phone Book is registered, inserting the “Memory Stick” into the Communication System changes the Phone Book to the Private Phone Book. You can also activate the Auto Dial feature, allowing you to

Notes

Phone Book > Group Edit

Previous

New Entry

TOKYO Cancel

Edit

Delete

Creating a Private Phone Book

126 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 127: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

automatically start dialing one of the remote parties registered in the Private Phone Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick”.

To register a new remote party in a Private Phone Book

1 Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to register a remote party into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing upward.

2 Open the Phone Book page in the Administrator setup menu.

For how to open the menu, see “Registering Local Information” on page 60.

3 Select “Create Private Phone Book”.An empty folder and file for a Private Phone Book are created in the “Memory Stick”.

4 Register a new remote party.The procedure is the same as that for registering in the Phone Book. Proceed with steps 2 to 4 in “Registering a New Remote Party” on page 120.

The procedures for how to edit the contents of the Private Phone Book, how to delete the registered remote party, or how to copy one of the registered parties in the Private Phone Book are the same as those for the Phone Book. Open the Private Phone Book and proceed with the steps described on pages 123 to 124.

Setup Phone BookAdministrator

Load Phone Book

Clear Phone Book

Save Phone Book

Auto Dialing

Create Private Phone Book

Delete Private Phone Book

Copy to Private Phone Book

Execute

Cancel

Execute

Execute

On

Execute

Execute

Execute

Administrator8

127Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 128: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To copy all the contents of the Phone Book to the Private Phone Book

Insert the “Memory Stick” in which you want to store the Private Phone Book into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System, then select “Copy to Private Phone Book” in the Administrator setup menu. All the data registered in the Phone Book are copied to the inserted “Memory Stick”.

To delete the Private Phone Book from the “Memory Stick”

Insert the “Memory Stick” from which you want to delete the registered Private Phone Book into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System, then select “Delete Private Phone Book” on the Phone Book page in the Administrator setup menu. All the data are deleted from the inserted “Memory Stick”.

To dial a specified remote party in a Private Phone Book automatically

If you set “Auto Dialing” in the Administrator setup menu to “On”, you can automatically dial one of the registered remote parties in the Private Phone Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is registered.

1 Open the Private Phone Book.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote party to dial automatically, then press the ENTER button.

3 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”, then press the ENTER button.The List Edit menu appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Auto Dialing”, then press the ENTER button.The setting is registered and “AUTO” appears in the Private Phone Book.

Using the Shared Phone Book function enables multiple Sony Visual Communication Systems to access to a Phone Book located on a server.

For detailed configuration, consult your network administrator.

• You can dial a remote party registered in the Shared Phone Book in the same manner as with the Phone Book. However, you cannot dial a remote party registered in a multipoint connection list.

Using the Shared Phone Book

Notes

128 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 129: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

• You cannot register a new party, delete a registered party, attach an image, or edit the Shared Phone Book. In addition, you cannot copy the remote parties registered in the Shared Phone Book to the Private Phone Book.

System configuration example

In this system configuration, sharing of a Phone Book using H.350 is enabled.

Using the Shared Phone Book

Check that “SPB Mode” is set to “On” in the Shared Phone Book setup menu, and enter appropriate values for “SPB Server Address” and “SPB Server Password”.

When “SPB Mode” is set to “On”, the Shared Phone Book menu button appears on the screen.

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

OPEN

LAN ALERT 1 LAN ALERT 2/

Directory server

H.350/LDAP

Shared Phone Book server

Setup Shared Phone Book

SPB Mode

SPB Server Address

SPB Server Password

On

CancelSave

Shared Phone Book

129Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 130: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To display the Shared Phone BookSelect “Shared Phone Book” in the Phone Book, and press the ENTER button. The display switches to the Shared Phone Book.

To restore the Phone Book, select “Phone Book” in the menu, and press the ENTER button.The procedure for dialing the registered remote party in the Shared Phone Book is the same as that for the Phone Book.

For details on dialing, see see “Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book” on page 112.

Room 102Room 101IP 255.255.255.255ISDN 01-2345-6789

Detailed Dial

History

New Entry

Group Edit

Phone Book

Phone Book

Home Default Group

130 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Page 131: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Adjusting the Sound

You can adjust the volume of the sound to be received from a remote party.Press the VOLUME + button on the Remote Commander to increase the volume, VOLUME – button to decrease it. The volume level indicator appears on the monitor screen. The indicator will automatically disappear if you do not operate the buttons for a certain time.

• You need to set the volume of the TV monitor to an appropriate level first.• If feedback or distortion caused by increasing the volume occurs, decrease the

volume.

You can momentarily turn off the sound to be sent to the remote party during communication.Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander. The sound of the local party is not heard by the remote party. The indicator appears on the monitor screen of the local site.The indicator appears on the monitor screen of the remote site, indicating that the sound of the local party is not transmitted.

To restore the soundPress the MIC ON/OFF button again.The indicator on the local site and the indicator on the remote site disappear and the sound is heard by the remote party.

Adjusting the Volume of the Received Sound

Notes

Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function

11

NEAR

NEAR

131Adjusting the Sound

Page 132: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

You can turn off the sound to be sent to a remote party when you have answered a call from the remote party.If you set “Mic on Answer” to “Off” in the Answer setup menu, only the picture on the local party will be sent to the remote party when answering a call. The indicator appears on the monitor screen.

For the setting, see “Mic on Answer” in the Answer setup menu on page 65.

To send the sound to the remote partyPress the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.The indicator disappears and the sound is heard by the remote party.

During the communication a time lag may occur between the sound and picture to be sent to the remote party, which prevents smooth communication.Using the Lip Sync function adjusts to synchronize audio and video. However, this may delay transmission of audio synchronized with video.The Lip Sync function is enabled if you set “Lip Sync” to “Auto” on the Basic Setup1 page in the Audio setup menu.

For the setting, see “Lip Sync”in the Audio setup menu on page 70.

To enable the Lip Sync function of the remote party, you have to ask them to do so.

The Communication System is equipped with the echo canceller function, allowing the echo that occurs during audio transmission to be reduced.Setting “Echo Canceller” to “On” on the Basic Setup1 page in the Audio setup menu activates the built-in echo canceller.When using an external echo canceller, set “Echo Canceller” to “Off”.

For details on the setting, see “Echo Canceller” in the Audio setup menu on page 70.

Turning Off the Sound on Answering – Mic on Answer Function

Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function

Note

Reducing Echo – Echo Canceller

NEAR

NEAR

132 Adjusting the Sound

Page 133: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Connection example for using an external echo canceller

For details on connecting the external echo canceller, refer to the operating instructions for the echo canceller you are using.

TERMINALVISCA OUT

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to AUDIO 1 IN

External echo canceller

External microphone mixer

PCS-A1 Microphone(not supplied)

Speaker

to AUDIO OUT

LINEOUT

LINE IN

133Adjusting the Sound

Page 134: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Adjusting the CameraYou can adjust the image shot by the local camera that is sent to the remote party to obtain the desired angle and size.During communication you can also control the camera on the remote site to adjust the image shot by the remote camera.

Determine the angle of view and the size of the picture to be displayed on the monitor screen by adjusting the angle and zoom.

1 Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button.The Camera menu appears.

2 Select the camera to be adjusted.During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.When two cameras are connected, pressing the F2 button on the Remote Commander switches between the first and second cameras.The selected camera is shown at the top of the Camera menu.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Adjustments”, then press the ENTER button.The Adjustments menu appears.

Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom

Details

Previous

Adjustments

Brightness

Preset

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00

134 Adjusting the Camera

Page 135: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

4 Adjust the camera angle so that the desired angle of view is obtained with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander.The selected camera pans and tilts, then the adjusted picture will be displayed in the small window or in full screen.

5 Use the ZOOM button on the Remote Commander to zoom in or out.Press the T (Telephoto) button to zoom in and the W (Wide angle) button to zoom out.

For details on digital zoom, see “To use the digital zoom function” on page 140.

To control the remote camera• To control the remote camera, set “Far End Camera Control” (page 68) to

“On” in the Communication setup menu for both the local and remote sites. If this setting is not configured properly, you will not be able to control the remote camera.

• You cannot control the remote camera during a session if the remote control format of the remote camera is not H.281. If you cannot control the remote camera, ask the remote party about the remote control format of his camera.

• If the local and remote parties try to control the same camera at the same time, the camera may not operate correctly.

Normally, the brightness is automatically adjusted to obtain optimum levels. You can also adjust it manually.It is recommended that the brightness be adjusted automatically to obtain optimum brightness.

To adjust the brightness manually

1 Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button.

Adjusting the Brightness

Adjustments > Camera Angle

Local Camera : First CameraT

W

Zoom indicatorPan/tilt indicator

135Adjusting the Camera

Page 136: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The Camera menu appears.

2 Select the camera to be adjusted.During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.When two cameras are connected, pressing the F2 button on the Remote Commander switches between the first and second cameras.The selected camera is shown at the top of the Camera menu.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Brightness”, then press the ENTER button.The Brightness adjustment menu appears.

4 Press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Manual Adjustment”, then press the ENTER button.The brightness adjustment bar is selected.

Details

Previous

Adjustments

Brightness

Preset

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00

Adjustments > Brightness

Auto Adjustment

Previous

5/11/2008 13:00

136 Adjusting the Camera

Page 137: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

6 Use the V, v, B or b button button on the Remote Commander to adjust the brightness of the screen.Pressing the b button increases the brightness, and pressing the B button decreases it.

The settings for local or remote camera angle and zoom can be registered in the preset memory. Once you have stored the settings, you can easily recall them to move the camera.Up to 100 settings can be registered for the local camera and up to 6 settings for the remote camera.The original position of the camera is registered in the Preset number 1 button at the factory.

To register the preset setting

1 Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button.The Camera menu appears.

2 Select the camera whose angle and zoom setting you want to preset.

Using the Preset Function

Adjustments > Brightness

Manual Adjustment

Previous

5/11/2008 13:00

Brightness adjustment bar

Details

Previous

Adjustments

Brightness

Preset

Camera

5/11/2008 13:00

137Adjusting the Camera

Page 138: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.When two cameras are connected, pressing the F2 button on the Remote Commander switches between the first and second cameras.The selected camera is shown at the top of the Camera menu.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset”, then press the ENTER button.The Preset Setting List appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b on the Remote Commander to select “New Entry”, then press the ENTER button.The Preset Save menu appears.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset Number”, then select the number to which the setting is stored.Only the numbers that have not been used for presetting are selectable.

6 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Adjustments” under “Camera Angle”, then press the ENTER button, if you want to adjust the camera zoom and angle.The Adjustments menu is displayed and you can adjust the zoom and angle.

For the adjustment procedures, see “Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom” on page 134.

New Entry

Back to Home

Adjustments > Preset Setting List

Local Camera : First Camera

1 2 3

4 5 6

Save

Adjustments

1

Cancel

Preset Number

Camera Angle

Thumbnails Register in Thumbnail/List

Adjustments > Preset Save

138 Adjusting the Camera

Page 139: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

7 After the adjustment is finished, press the RETURN button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The Preset Save menu is restored.

8 When you want to register a thumbnail, use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Thumbnails” and press the ENTER button to check the checkmark for “Register in Thumbnail/List”.

9 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The angle and zoom settings are stored in the selected number, and the preset number is listed in the Preset Setting List.

To move the camera to the preset position

1 Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button.The Camera menu appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset” in the Camera menu, then press the ENTER button.The Preset Setting List appears.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the preset number you want to recall, then press the ENTER button.You can also recall the preset numbers 1 to 6 by pressing the number buttons 1 to 6 on the Remote Commander.The submenu appears.

4 Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Load”, then press the ENTER button.The camera moves to the selected preset position.

You can select the items below from the submenu:“Cancel”: Cancels selection of the preset position.“Edit”: Changes the selected preset position.

Note

New Entry

Back to Home

1 2 3

4 5 6

Adjustments > Preset Setting List

Local Camera : First Camera

139Adjusting the Camera

Page 140: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

“Delete”: Deletes the selected preset position.

When you select “Details” in the Camera menu, the more detailed setup menu opens. You can adjust various items for camera adjustment.

To use the digital zoom function

Set “Digital Zoom” to “On”.

To use backlight compensation function

When the subject is shot with a bright background, set “Backlight” to “On”. The backlight compensation is activated and you can obtain a bright picture.

To adjust the white balance

Set the white balance depending on the shooting location.Auto: Adjusts the white balance automatically.Indoor: Select when shooting the subject indoors.Outdoor: Select when shooting the subject outdoors.ONE PUSH: Select when adjusting the white balance by shooting a white

object in the center of the screen.

To adjust the focus automatically

Select “Auto” in the Focus drop-down list and press the ENTER button. The focus is automatically adjusted.

To adjust the focus manually

1 Select “Manual” in the Focus drop-down list.

2 Select “Focus Adjustment” and press the ENTER button.

3 Adjust the focus using the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander.To focus on a distant subject, press the b button.To focus on a near subject, press the B button.

Adjusting the Camera in the Detailed Setup Menu

Digital Zoom

Backlight

White Balance

Focus

Focus Adjustment

On

On

OK

Auto

Auto

BrightFace

Noise Reduction Filter

Medium

Medium

140 Adjusting the Camera

Page 141: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

To use the BrightFace function

The BrightFace function is provided if the scene is shot by the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit. When the function is enabled, brightness and contrast are automatically adjusted and as the result the dark part of a scene is shot brighter and the bright part is shot clearer. Even when the scene is shot in a dark room or a backlit room with a window or window shade, human faces are shot brighter.To use the BrightFace function, set “BrightFace” to “High”, “Medium” or “Low”.Set “BrightFace” to “Off” when you do not use the BrightFace function.

The BrightFace function is not available with other camera than the PCSA-CXG80.

To use the Noise Reduction Filter

If you set up Noise Reduction Filter, picture noise can be reduced. You can select the noise reduction level from among “High”, “Medium” and “Low”. If you do not use Noise Reduction Filter, set it to “Off”.

Note

141Adjusting the Camera

Page 142: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Selecting the Input Picture and SoundYou can switch the picture displayed on the monitor screen, and switch between the input picture and audio.

When the displayed picture on the monitor can be switched during communication, pressing the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander displays the indication “F1: Switches the monitored picture between the remote and local sites.” at the bottom of the monitor.Each press of the F1 button on the Remote Commander switches the displayed picture between those on the local and remote sites.

1 Press the VIDEO INPUT button on the Remote Commander.The Video Input > Near menu appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the video input on the local site, then press the ENTER button.The picture input from the selected equipment is displayed on the monitor screen.

CAMERA: Selects the picture from the camera connected to the CAMERA connector.

S VIDEO: Selects the picture from the equipment (second camera, etc.) connected to the S VIDEO IN connector.

RGB: Selects the picture from the equipment connected to the RGB IN connector.

YPbPr: Selects the picture from the equipment connected to the VIDEO IN YPbPr jacks.

3 To store the selected input in the memory of the system, use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The Video Input menu disappears.

Switching the Displayed Picture between the Local and Remote Pictures

Selecting the Input Picture

Save Cancel

YPbPrRGBS VIDEOCAMERA

Video Input > Near

142 Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

Page 143: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

The stored video input is not deleted even after the system is turned off, and is selected when the power is turned on again.

To change the video input name displayed in the Video Input menu

You can label the desired name for each video input on the Custom Input Label page in the Video setup menu. When you switch the video input in step 2 above, the name you set is displayed in the Video Input menu.For example, you can label: Camera1, Camera2, None, etc.

For details, see“Custom Input Label” in the Video setup menu on page 73.

If you assign the video input (Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB or YPbPr) to any of the F1 to F4 buttons on the Remote Commander in “Function Keys in Communication” of the General setup menu, you can quickly switch the video input only by pressing one of the F1 to F4 buttons.

For details, see “Function Keys in Communication” in the General setup menu on page 83.

You can switch the sound sent to the remote party between the sound from the microphone and that from the connected equipment. Use “Audio Input” in the Audio setup menu.

For details, see “Audio Input” in the Audio setup menu on page 70.

Set “Link to Audio Input” to “On” on the Link to Mic page of the Video setup menu. When you switch the video input, the audio input automatically switches to the one which has been set to link to the switched video input.

For details, see“Link to Audio Input” in the Video setup menu on page 73.

You can switch the picture output from the remote system during communication.Press the VIDEO INPUT button, then F1 button on the Remote Commander. The Video Input > Far menu appears.

Selecting the Video Input Using the F1 to F4 (Function) Buttons on the Remote Commander

Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party

Switching Video and Audio at the Same Time

Switching the Picture from the Remote System

143Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

Page 144: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the picture output from the equipment connected to the remote system, then press the ENTER button. The selected picture is input to the local system and is displayed on the monitor screen.

You can only select the picture that can be output from the remote system. Note

Save Cancel

YPbPrRGBS VIDEO

Sub Document CameraDocument CameraSub Camera

CAMERA

Video Input > Far

144 Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

Page 145: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen

You can display the pictures on the local and remote sites on the monitor screen at the same time. This enables you to check how your own party is monitored on the remote site.

1 Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander.The Layout menu appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select one of the screen display patterns, then press the ENTER button.You can select from among the following eight patterns:Full: Displays the remote picture in full screen.PandP: Displays the remote picture on the left of the screen in large size

and the local picture on the right in small size.Side by Side: Displays the remote and local pictures side by side.PinP: Displays the local window picture in the remote full picture.

You can select the location of the window picture from among five patterns.

3 To store the selected screen display pattern in the memory of the system, use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The Layout menu disappears.

To swap the location of the remote and local pictures

When the displayed picture can be switched during communication, pressing the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander displays the indication “F1:

Monitor Select Mode

PandPFull

Layout

Screen Display Patterns

Side by Side

Save Cancel

HDMI RGB HDMI+RGB

PinP

PinPPinPPinPPinP

145Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen

Page 146: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Switches the monitored picture between the remote and local sites.” at the bottom of the monitor.Each press of the F1 button on the Remote Commander swaps the location of both pictures.

To switch the display to the received RGB picture

When you receive an RGB computer picture from a remote party during communication, the instruction “F2: Switches to the RGB monitor screen.” is displayed at the bottom of the monitor. The RGB picture is displayed by pressing the F2 button on the Remote Commander. To restore the previously displayed picture, press the F2 button again.

When you connect two monitors and set “Monitor Select Mode” to “HDMI+RGB”, you cannot switch to RGB picture by pressing the F2 button.

Note

146 Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen

Page 147: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 3: B

asic Connection

Capturing the ScreenYou can capture the image displayed on the screen by using “Screen Capture” in the Tools menu and display the captured image on the Phone Book. The captured image is stored in the “Memory Stick”.

To capture the local image

1 Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to save the capturing image into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.

2 Display the image you want to capture on the monitor screen.

For details on adjusting the camera, see “Adjusting the Camera” on page 134.

3 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B or b button to select “Tools” in the Home menu and press the ENTER button.The Tools menu appears.

4 Press the b button on the Remote Commander, and select “Execute” for “Screen Capture” with the V, v, B or b button then press the ENTER button.

The image displayed on the monitor is captured and stored in the “Memory Stick”.

For the procedure how to display the captured image on the Phone Book, see “Registering a New Remote Party” on page 120.

To capture the remote image

1 Display the image of the remote site you want to capture on the monitor screen during communication.

For details on adjusting the remote camera, see “Adjusting the Camera” on page 134.

Memory Stick

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

147Capturing the Screen

Page 148: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

2 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to display the Tools menu.

3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Execute” for “Screen Capture”, then press the ENTER button.The remote picture is captured and is stored in the “Memory Stick”.

148 Capturing the Screen

Page 149: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

This chapter describes the various connections using the optional equipment in addition to the components contained in the PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System.

To make a multipoint connection, see chapter 6.

Using a Tools MenuPressing the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander opens the Tools menu on the monitor screen.The Tools menu allows you to perform operations often used simply by selecting the item in the menu.

Pressing the b button on the Remote Commander, selecting each item with the V, v, B or b button and pressing the ENTER button enable the following operations:

• “Presentation” is displayed only when the PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution software (not supplied) is installed in the Communication System.

• “Reject Answer” is available only when the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software (not supplied) is installed in the Communication System.

Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment

Notes

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

149Using a Tools Menu

Page 150: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

PresentationPressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to transmit an RGB picture input from a connected computer to a remote party. During transmission, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable item changes to “Stop”. To stop transmitting the RGB picture, select “Stop” and press the ENTER button.

For details on presentation, see “Using the Computer Picture for Presentation” on page 152.

StreamingPressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to broadcast live stream of the visual communication, and people who do not participate in the communication can watch it over the Web. During broadcasting, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable menu item changes “Stop”. To stop broadcasting a live stream, select “Stop” and press the ENTER button.

For details, see “Streaming a Communication” on page 155.

RecordingPressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to save the video and audio of the visual communication in progress in a “Memory Stick”. While the recording is being saved, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable menu item changes to “Stop”. Selecting “Stop” and pressing the ENTER button stops recording.

For details on recording, see “Recording a Visual Communication” on page 157.

AnnotationPressing the ENTER button displays the Annotation Start menu. You can transmit the picture with letters and graphics overwritten with a commercially available pen tablet or display a pointer on the screen (Annotation function). While the annotation function is being executed, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable menu item changes to “Stop”. Selecting “Stop” and pressing the ENTER button ends annotation.

For details on annotation, see “Using the Annotation Function” on page 159.

Icon DisplayPressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander and selecting “On” with the V, v, B or b button display the indicators on the screen. Selecting “Off” hides the indicators.

Reject AnswerPressing the ENTER button and selecting “On” with the V, v, B or b button enables you to reject incoming calls from other terminals during communication. Selecting “Off” results in accepting the incoming calls.

150 Using a Tools Menu

Page 151: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Screen CapturePressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to save the picture displayed on the screen in a “Memory Stick” as a still image.

For details on screen capture, see “Capturing the Screen” on page 147.

151Using a Tools Menu

Page 152: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Using the Computer Picture for Presentation

If you install the optional PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution software in your system, you can transmit an RGB picture input from a computer, etc. with the local picture simultaneously to a remote party.

You can receive a computer picture transmitted from the remote party even if the PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution software is not installed.

1 Ensure that the Communication System is turned off.

2 Insert the Key Module of the HD Data Solution software into the TABLET connector.

3 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the System to turn it on.The PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution software is installed in the System.

Note

Installing the HD Data Solution Software

PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution software

to TABLET

152 Using the Computer Picture for Presentation

Page 153: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

To configure the presentation mode

When you transmit an RGB picture from a computer, etc. and a camera picture simultaneously to a remote party, the remote party can view both pictures simultaneously. This function is called “to make a presentation using the presentation mode complying with H.239”. Using this function allows smooth reproduction of both camera and computer pictures. To make a presentation using the presentation mode complying with H.239, it is necessary to turn on the presentation mode on both the local and remote systems. If the presentation mode on either of the systems is turned off, a presentation complying with H.239 cannot be made.To configure the presentation mode, set “H.239” to “On” on the IP: Mode page (page 66) or on the ISDN: Mode page (page 68) of the Communication setup menu.

To start a presentation

1 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools menu.

2 Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b button to select “Execute” for “Presentation”.

Connecting a Computer

Making a Presentation

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

TERMINALVISCA OUT

Connecting cable with theD-sub 15-pin connectors

(not supplied)

to RGB IN

Computer

to RGB OUT

153Using the Computer Picture for Presentation

Page 154: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The RGB picture from the computer is transmitted to the remote party.While presentation is being executed, the message “Executing” appears on the screen.

You can also transmit the computer picture to the remote party by pressing the PRESENTATION button on the Remote Commander instead of performing steps 1 and 2 above.

To change the display pattern of the presentation when the H.239 function is disabled

Select the display pattern for the presentation with “Presentation Screen” on the Basic Setup page of the Video setup menu (page 72) before starting a presentation.Full Screen: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system is

displayed in full screen.PandP: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system and the

selected input picture (local camera picture, etc.) are displayed in PandP mode.

Side by Side: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system and the selected input picture (local camera picture, etc.) are displayed in Side by Side mode.

If the remote system does not support H.239, you cannot transmit the input picture (camera picture, etc.) and the computer picture as two streams, even if “H.239” is set to “On” on your system.

To stop the presentation

Select “Stop” for “Presentation” in the Tools menu and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander. Transmission of the computer picture stops.You can also stop the presentation by pressing the PRESENTATION button on the Remote Commander.

Note

Note

Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Executing]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

Machine Status

Setup

Home

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Stop

154 Using the Computer Picture for Presentation

Page 155: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Streaming a CommunicationBy broadcasting a stream of a visual communication, people who cannot attend the communication can watch the proceedings over the Web using a computer.Before broadcasting a live stream, be sure to configure the live stream permission setting.

For details on viewing a streamed communication, see Chapter 7.

For details on the streaming settings, see “Streaming” on the Streaming/Recording page of the Administrator setup menu on page 87.

Starting a streaming broadcast

1 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools menu.

2 Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b button to select “Execute” for “Streaming”, then press the ENTER button.The streaming broadcast starts, and the communication in progress can be watched from a computer over the Web.While the streaming broadcast is running, the message “Streaming [Executing]” is displayed in the Tools menu and the menu item changes to “Stop”.

• If you start streaming before a communication begins, the broadcast will continue streaming after the communication begins.

• Depending on Web access limitations, about 10 terminals can view a streaming broadcast simultaneously. The actual number of terminals that can view the broadcast simultaneously depends on your system’s operating environment.

Notes

Tools

Machine Status

Setup

Home Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Executing]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Stop

155Streaming a Communication

Page 156: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To stop a streaming broadcast

Selecting “Stop” for “Streaming” in the Tools menu and pressing the ENTER button stop the streaming broadcast.

• Even if the Communication System is turned off while the streaming broadcast is being executed, the streaming broadcast continues.

• The streaming broardcast cannot be executed during encrypted connection.

Notes

156 Streaming a Communication

Page 157: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Recording a Visual CommunicationThe video and audio of a visual communication can be saved in a “Memory Stick” in MPEG4 format. The saved data can then be viewed on a computer.

For details on the recording settings, see “Recording” on the “Streaming/Recording” page of the Administrator setup menu on page 87.

To start recording

1 Insert a “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot.

2 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools menu.

3 Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b button to select “Execute” for “Recording”, then press the ENTER button.The message “Start recording?” appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button.Recording in the “Memory Stick” starts. During recording, the message “Recording [Executing]” is displayed in the Tools menu and the menu item changes to “Stop”.

Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Executing]

[Suspended]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

Machine Status

Setup

Home

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Stop

157Recording a Visual Communication

Page 158: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To stop recording

1 Select “Stop” for “Recording” in the Tools menu, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The message “Stop recording?” appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button.Recording in the “Memory Stick” stops.

• If the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick” is no longer enough for storage during recording, the recording stops automatically and a notification message appears.

• Although the recorded MPEG4 files have the same file type name as the MPEG4 files that can be played on the PSP or other devices that support the “Memory Stick” video format, you cannot play the files on these devices even after the files are recognized and moved to the file directories of these devices.

• Recording cannot be executed during encrypted connection.

Notes

158 Recording a Visual Communication

Page 159: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Using the Annotation FunctionDuring communication you can transmit or receive letters and graphics written on the screen with a pen tablet as they are written. You can also point the camera picture or computer picture with a pointer. This function is called “Annotation”.The pen tablet that can be used for the annotation function is BambooMTE450* manufactured only by Wacom Co., Ltd.

* Wacom and the Wacom logo are registered trademarks of Wacom Co., Ltd.Bamboo is a trademark.

For details on the BambooMTE450, consult with a Sony dealer.

The communication using a pen tablet is only available for communication between the PCS-XG80/XG80S Communication Systems. A pen tablet cannot be used for communication with other Sony communication systems.

1 Turn off the Communication System.

2 Connect the pen tablet to the TABLET connector on the front panel of the Communication System.

3 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the System to turn it on.

To start annotation

1 Start communication.

Note

Connecting a Pen Tablet

Using the Annotation Function while in Communication

to TABLET

Pen tablet

159Using the Annotation Function

Page 160: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

2 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools menu.

3 Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b button to select “Execute” for “Annotation”, then press the ENTER button.

The Annotation Start menu appears.

4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Background Screen” for executing the annotation function and press the ENTER button.

Remote Picture: Selects the picture on the remote site as the backgroundLocal Picture: Selects the picture on the local site as the backgroundReceived Computer Picture: Selects the computer picture received from

the remote site as the backgroundTransmitting Computer Picture: Selects the computer picture on the

local site as the background

• “Received Computer Picture” can be selected only when the computer picture is being received from the remote site.

• “Transmitting Computer Picture” can be selected only when the computer picture is being transmitted from the local site.

5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Annotation Mode” and press the ENTER button.Drawing: Allows you to write letters or graphics on the screen.Pointing: Allows display of a pointer on the screen.

Notes

Presentation

Streaming

Recording

Annotation

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Suspended]

[Executing]

Icon display

Reject Answer

Screen Capture

Tools

Machine Status

Setup

Home

On

Off

Execute

Execute

Execute

Execute

Stop

Local Picture

Received Computer Picture

Remote Picture

Transmitting Computer Picture

CancelStart

Annotation Mode

Drawing Pointing

Background Screen

160 Using the Annotation Function

Page 161: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

6 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Start”

and press the ENTER button.The indicator indicating that the local party uses annotation appears.When the Drawing mode is selected, (pen) indicator appears on the monitor screen and (pointer) appears when the Pointing mode is selected.

7 Write letters or graphics on the screen with a pen supplied with the pen tablet, or move the pointer on the screen.The written data is displayed on the screen in live.

For details on how to use the pen tablet, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the pen tablet.

Operations during pointing

You can point to any desired portion on the monitor screen with a pointer. You cannot write letters and graphics in pointing mode.

Operations during drawing

Operate using the function keys on the tablet and the buttons on the pen.

/

Monitor screen

161Using the Annotation Function

Page 162: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To start drawingPress the < key on the tablet.

To stop drawingPress the > key on the tablet.

To change the colorPress the lower pen button. Each press changes the color. You can select from among black, red, blue, green, yellow, orange, purple and white.

To change the line densityPress the upper pen button. Each press changes the line density. You can select from three different line densities.

To erase with the eraserTouch the tail switch (eraser) of the pen onto the tablet and move it on the letters or graphics you want to erase.

To erase all written letters and graphics Press the FN2 key on the tablet.

To obtain the drawing rightsNormally, the drawing rights belong to the party who starts annotation. In the case that the remote party starts annotation, the Obtain Drawing Rights button appears and the indicator (Drawing executed by the remote party) on the monitor screen on the local site.If you want to obtain the drawing rights, press the FN1 key on the tablet. The

indicator (Drawing executed by the local party) appears on the monitor screen, and you are allowed to write letters and graphics on the screen.

To save the drawings written using annotation

1 Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to save the drawings using annotation into the Communication System.

Start Stop

Drawing Rights Erase All

Eraser

Select Line Density

Select Color

162 Using the Annotation Function

Page 163: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

2 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools

menu.

3 Select “Execute” for “Screen Capture” in the Tools menu.The drawing using annotation on the screen is saved in the “Memory Stick” as a still image.

To end the annotation mode

1 Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools menu.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Stop” for “Annotation”, then press the ENTER button.The annotation mode ends.The letters and graphics written using the annotation function are deleted when the communication ends.

163Using the Annotation Function

Page 164: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Using Multiple MicrophonesYou can input the stereo sound from two PCS-A1 (supplied with the PCS-XG80) or PCSA-A3 (not supplied) microphones to the system.

If you are using an echo canceling microphone, see “Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones” on page 167.

To connect the microphones

Connect the optional microphones to the MIC (A1/A3) 1 (R) and 2 (L) jacks on the Communication System. Power is supplied to the microphones from the System.

To use the connected microphones

Set “Audio Input” to “MIC” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu, and set “Input Select (MIC)” to “MIC (A1/A3)” (page 70).To input the stereo sound from two microphones, set “Input Mode” to “Stereo” (page 71). Set it to “Monaural” to input monaural sound from two microphones.

Notes on installation of the microphones• Install microphone about 50 cm (1.6 ft) away from the participants.• Place the microphone in a quiet, echo-free location.

TERMINALVISCA OUT

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to MIC (A1/A3)1 (R)

PCS-A1 (supplied with the PCS-XG80) or PCSA-A3 microphone (not supplied)

Microphone (Left)

Microphone (Right)

to MIC (A1/A3) 2 (L)

164 Using Multiple Microphones

Page 165: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

• Install the speakers so that the participants do not come between it and the

microphones.• Install microphones away from equipment that may cause noise.• Avoid covering the microphones, with paper for example, or carrying the

microphones and moving them. If you do either, extreme noise and echo may be heard temporarily by the remote party. In this case, wait until the echo disappears.

• When stereo sound is input, locate the microphone connected to the MIC (A1/A3) 1 (R) jack on the right of the camera and the microphone connected to the MIC (A1/A3) 2 (L) jack on the left.

165Using Multiple Microphones

Page 166: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Microphone layout examples

PCS-A1

PCS-XG80/XG80S

PCS-A1 microphones

PCSA-A3

PCSA-A3 microphones

PCS-XG80/XG80S

166 Using Multiple Microphones

Page 167: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Using the PCSA-A7 MicrophonesConnection of multiple PCSA-A7 microphones (not supplied) allows communication among a large number of participants.The PCSA-A7 microphones have the following characteristics:• Built-in echo canceller• Noise reduction• High quality sound• Several PCSA-A7 microphones can be connected in cascade without losing

sound quality.

The PCSA-A7 is a monaural microphone and cannot pick up sound in stereo.

To connect the PCSA-A7 microphones

Connect the PCSA-A7 microphones to the EC-MIC (A7) 1 and EC-MIC (A7) 2 connectors of the Communication System. Power to the microphones is supplied by the Communication System.

Note

TERMINALVISCA OUT

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to EC-MIC (A7) 2to EC-MIC (A7) 1

PCSA-A7 microphones (PCSA-A7P4: 4-piece set, not supplied)

167Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones

Page 168: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To use the microphones

Set “Audio Input” to “MIC”, and “Input Select (MIC)” to “EC-MIC (A7)” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu. (page 69)

Notes on placing the PCSA-A7 microphones• Position the microphones about 50 cm (1.6 ft) away from the participants.• When using speakers, do not place them in front of the microphones. In

addition, avoid placing the speakers where participants may come between it and the microphones.

Configuration using the PCSA-A7 microphones

Power is supplied to up to eight microphones connected to the Visual Communication System or the AC adaptor, including cascade connections. However, using the 8-meter microphone cable counts as 4 microphones.Power is not supplied to any connected microphones that exceed this limit. You can add more microphones, by connecting the AC adaptor to the first non-powered microphone.

• Up to 40 PCSA-A7 microphones can be connected to one port, using a cascade connection.

• The POWER LED turns off on a microphone with no power supply.

The 8-meter microphone cable counts as four microphones, and power is supplied to only the first four microphones. The same is true if the 8-meter microphone cable is used in the middle of the connections.

Notes

5 6 7 8 9 10

Setup example 1:

168 Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones

Page 169: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Up to eight microphones are powered by the AC adaptor, counting from the microphone connected to the AC adaptor.

The 8-meter microphone cable is used in the middle of the connections, and counts as four microphones. Up to four microphones are powered by the AC adaptor, counting from the microphone connected to the AC adaptor.

Microphones layout example

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Setup example 2:

1 2 7 8 9 10

Setup example 3:

PCS-XG80/XG80S

PCSA-A7

169Using the PCSA-A7 Microphones

Page 170: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Using a Second CameraYou can connect the second camera through the PCSA-CXG80 Camera Unit.

Connection example for a second camera

Connect the video output connector on the second camera to the VIDEO IN YPbPr jacks on the front of the Communication System or the S VIDEO IN or RGB IN connector at the rear.

Select “YPbPr”, “S-VIDEO” or “RGB” in “Second Camera Input” of the Camera setup menu depending on the connector to which the camera is connected.

To switch the picture shot by two cameras

When you open the Camera menu, the instruction “F2: Switches to the first camera.” or “F2: Switches to the second camera.” is displayed at the bottom of the monitor screen. Each press of the F2 button on the Remote Commander changes the picture shot by each camera.

For the procedure how to open the Camera menu, see “Adjusting the Camera” on page 134.

TERMINALVISCA OUT

/

OPEN

VIDEO IN AUDIO 2 INMAINTENANCEY Pb Pr L R

VISCA cable (not supplied)

to VISCA OUT to VISCA IN

Second camera

to Video output (YPbPr)

Video cable (not supplied)to VIDEO IN

YPbPr

First camera (PCSA-CXG80)

170 Using a Second Camera

Page 171: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Recording during a CommunicationYou can record the voices of participants on both the remote and local sites during a communication if you connect an audio recorder to the REC OUT jack on the Communication System.This is convenient for taking minutes of the communication.

To connect an audio recorder

When recording with an audio recorder

When an audio recorder is connected to both the AUDIO IN and REC OUT jacks, set “Recording Mute” to “On” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu, since the echo may cause and is transmitted to a remote party (page 69).To record the sound output from the REC OUT L/R jacks in 2-channel monaural, set “REC OUT Mode” to “Monaural 2ch” on the Basic Setup2 page of the Audio setup menu.

TERMINALVISCA OUT

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to audioinputs

Audio recording device

Audio cable (not supplied)

to REC OUT L/R

171Recording during a Communication

Page 172: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party

The Communication System allows you to send the picture and sound output from the connected equipment such as a VCR to a remote party.

To connect the video equipment for input The Communication System is equipped with two video inputs.

To input audio/video from external equipment

To input video

Press the VIDEO INPUT button on the Remote Commander to open the Video Input >Near menu, then select the video you want to input.

TERMINALVISCA OUT

/

OPEN

VIDEO IN AUDIO 2 INMAINTENANCEY Pb Pr L R

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to VIDEO IN YPbPr

to S-video output

to AUDIO 1 IN

HD player, etc.

to audio output

Audio cable (not supplied)

to AUDIO 2 IN

to S VIDEO IN

S-video cable (not supplied)

VCR, etc.

Video cable (not supplied)

Audio cable (not supplied)

to video output (YPbPr)

to audio output

172 Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party

Page 173: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the external equipment connected to each video input on the Communication System, then press the ENTER buttton.The picture from the selected equipment is displayed.CAMERA: Video shot by the camera unit connected to the CAMERA

connector.S VIDEO: Video of the camera or video equipment connected to the S VIDEO

IN connector.RGB: Video of a computer, etc. connected to the RGB IN connector.YPbPr: Video of the camera or video equipment connected to the VIDEO IN

YPbPr jacks.

To save the selected input, press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.

To input audioSet “Audio Input” to “AUX” or “MIC+AUX” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu (page 69).When set to “AUX”, the sound from the external equipment is input and the sound from a microphone is deactivated. When set to “MIC+AUX”, both sounds are input.To switch to the sound from the external equipment connected to the AUDIO 1 IN or AUDIO 2 IN jacks, set “Input Select (AUX)” to “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu (page 70).

To switch the input video and audio at the same timeSet “Link to Audio Input” to “On” on the Link to Mic page of the Video setup menu (page 73) so as to link the audio you want to switch at the same time with the video input.When the video input is switched, the audio input is simultaneously switched to the one linked to the video input.

Save Cancel

YPbPrRGBS VIDEOCAMERA

Video Input > Near

173Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party

Page 174: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector

When the monitor or projector is connected to the Communication System, you can view the picture from the system.

To connect a monitor or projector

To use the connected display equipment

When outputting the picture both to the monitor connected to the HDMI OUT connector and the display equipment connected to the RGB OUT connector, set “Monitor Output” to “HDMI+RGB” on the Basic Setup page of the Video setup menu (page 72).For RGB output, you can select the video format of the signal output from the RGB OUT connector with “RGB Monitor Output Format”. You can select “SXGA”, “XGA” or “WXGA” (page 72).

• The HDMI output is available only when the output signal is of 1080i video format.• If “Monitor Output” is set to “HDMI+RGB” when no HDMI monitor is connected to

the Communication System, you cannot view the menus. Before making this setting, be sure to connect an HDMI monitor.

Notes

TERMINALVISCA OUT

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

to RGBOUT

to HDMI OUT

Connecting cable with D-sub 15-pin connectors

Monitor, projector, etc.

Monitor

to HDMI IN

HDMI cable (supplied)

to RGB IN

174 Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector

Page 175: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Pictures displayed on the two monitors

During communication, the following images are displayed on the two monitors.

Picture displayed on the first monitorThe local or remote picture shot by the camera (moving picture) is monitored on the first monitor connected to the HDMI OUT connector.To switch between the local and remote pictures, press the LAYOUT button, then F1 button on the Remote Commander.

Picture displayed on the second monitorThe picture shot by the local camera or the RGB picture transmitted from the remote party can be displayed on the second monitor connected to the RGB OUT connector.

Local camera picture

Remote camera picture

Local camera picture

F1 button

Remote camera picture

175Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector

Page 176: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Communicating without the Picture – Voice Meeting

The Visual Communication System enables a voice only communication using telephones via an ISDN line. (Voice Meeting)Basic connecting procedures are the same as those for normal communication with audio/video.

Conducting a voice meeting with a remote party not registered in the phone book

Set “Line I/F” to “TEL” in the Detailed Dial menu.During the Voice Meeting, the “Voice Only” indicator is displayed.

For “Line I/F” setting, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book” on page 114.

To register a remote party for a Voice Meeting

Set “Line I/F” to “TEL” in the List Edit menu displayed from the Phone Book.

For registration, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 120.

To set the audio compression format

Select the audio compression format by setting “Telephone Mode” of the Dial setup menu.When you initiate the voice meeting, set “Telephone Mode” to “Auto” (page 64). When set to “Auto”, the G.711 µ-law format is automatically selected.You need not set the audio compression format when receiving a call for a Voice Meeting from the remote party.

176 Communicating without the Picture – Voice Meeting

Page 177: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 4: C

onnection with O

ptional Equipm

ent

Controlling the Remote System with the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission

The Visual Communication System enables you to control the remote system connected by transmitting the tone signal (DTMF: Dual Tone Multi Frequency) assigned to the numbers for dialing (0-9, , ).

1 Press the TONE ( ) button on the Remote Commander during communication.The DTMF menu appears on the monitor screen.

2 Press one of the number buttons (0-9, , ) on the Remote Commander corresponding to the tone signal you want to transmit to the remote party.The tone signal will be transmitted when the button is pressed.

3 To stop transmitting the tone signal, press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.The DTMF menu disappears.

The microphone is automatically turned off while the DTMF menu is displayed.

Note

177Controlling the Remote System with the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission

Page 178: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Accessing the Communication SystemThe following controls are available to access the Communication System. For details on each control, consult your Sony dealer.

You can control or set up the Communication System by accessing it from a Web browser.To access the Communication System from a Web browser, set “Web Monitor” to “On” and “Web Access” to “Enabled” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu (page 87).

For details on Web operation, see Chapter 7, “Web Control Function”.

You can control or set up the Communication System by accessing it with Telnet.To access the Communication System from Telnet, set “Telnet Access” to “Enabled” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu (page 87).

Using a Web Browser

Using Telnet

178 Accessing the Communication System

Page 179: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 5: E

ncrypted Connection

When a strictly confidential communication is required, the communication system enables a connection with encrypted video and audio. A connection conducted using this feature is known as an encrypted connection.This chapter describes how to conduct an encrypted connection.The Communication System is equipped with standard encryption, which complies with the H.233, H.234 and H.235 standerdized by the ITU-T.

• Streaming and recording are not available during an encrypted connection.• The maximum bandwidth for encrypted connections is 6 Mbps.

Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection

Notes

179

Page 180: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN

To start an encrypted connection, “Encryption Mode” must be set in the Encryption setup menu.

Set “Encryption Mode” to “Connect Priority” or “Encrypt Priority” in the Encryption setup menu.

Connect PriorityConnects with encryption to a remote party with standard encrypted connection enabled. Connects without encryption to parties unable to connect with standard encryption or parties with encryption set to off.

Setup Encryption

5/11/2008 13:00IP:192.168.0.11

Encryption Mode Connect Priority

CancelSave

Encryption

Connect with encryption

Local system:Standard encrypted connection available

Remote system:Standard encrypted connection available

Local system:Standard encrypted connection available

Remote system:Standard encrypted connection unavailable

Connect without encryption

180 Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN

Page 181: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 5: E

ncrypted Connection

Encrypt PriorityConnects only to remote parties with standard encrypted connection enabled.

Do not connect

Connect with encryption

Local system:Standard encrypted connection available

Remote system:Standard encrypted connection available

Local system:Standard encrypted connection available

Remote system:Standard encrypted connection unavailable

181Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN

Page 182: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Starting an Encrypted ConnectionYou can start an encrypted connection by calling a remote party in the same manner as a daily connection.During an encrypted connection, the encryption icon, , is displayed.

If there is no icon displayed, transmitted and received data are not encrypted. Confirm if an icon is displayed before starting a connection.

When the encrypted connection is disabledIf the following message appears when you call a remote party, an encrypted connection is not available.

Note

Error Messages Causes

The far-end system is not compatible with the encryption feature.

The remote system is not equipped with an encryption feature.

The encryption feature on a far-end system is disabled.

The encryption feature on a remote system is turned off or the signal encryption method setting on the remote system is different from that on the local system.

The encryption feature on a far-end system is enabled.

The encryption feature on a remote system is turned on.

The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the near-end side was disabled.

“Encryption Mode” is set to “Off” on the local system.

The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the far-end side was disabled.

The encryption feature on the remote system is disabled.

The conference could not start because the signal encryption method at the near-end side differed from that of the far-end side.

The encryption method setting on the remote system is not the same as that on the local system.

H

182 Starting an Encrypted Connection

Page 183: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 5: E

ncrypted Connection

The standard encryption videoconference with SIP connection is not available.

You are connected to the remote system via SIP connection.

Error Messages Causes

183Starting an Encrypted Connection

Page 184: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This chapter describes how to connect your system to multiple points.For multipoint connection, installation of the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is required.When connecting via a LAN, multipoint connection among up to 10 points including your site is available. When connecting via an ISDN, multipoint connection among up to six points including your site is available, and a phone can be used at up to five points among six.A multipoint connection using LAN and ISDN mixed is also available.

Restrictions on the use of the MCU software• When a multipoint connection is made via LAN, you can set up the total

communication bit rate for all the connecting points with “Total Bandwidth” in the Communication setup menu. As the communication bit rate for each point is automatically adjusted so as not to exceed the value selected in “Total Bandwidth”, actual bit rate per point may differ from that selected for that point.

• When a multipoint connection is made via an ISDN, the same number of channels should be used on all the points and the total channels must not exceed 12B.

• The H.264, H.263+ and H.261 video modes are supported.• The G.711, G.722, G.728 and MPEG4 AAC audio modes are supported.• A multipoint connection including a SIP connection is not available.• Only the PCS-XG80/XG80S is enabled for use as a main terminal for the

cascade connection.• When the local system is used as the main terminal and connected with

remote terminals other than the PCS-XG80/XG80S, the maximum bandwidth to be used is restricted to 4 MHz.

Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection

184

Page 185: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Installing the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in an HD Visual Communication System allows you to connect multiple points up to six.If you have already made a point-to-point connection when a third point calls, the system automatically starts multipoint connection.

For a multipoint connection only the Communication System with the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software installed can be used as main terminal. If you want to use multiple Communication Systems as main terminals depending on the type of connection, the same number of HD MCU software as that of main terminals is required to install.

Using the LAN Connection (Up to Six Points)

Note

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

to LAN

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

to 1 or 2 (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)

UTP cable (category 5, straight) (not supplied)

185Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Page 186: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Installing the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in two HD Visual Communication Systems enables cascade connection with two main terminals, allowing you to make a multipoint connection among up to ten points by connecting four to each main terminal.

• Even if the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is installed in three or more Communication Systems, cascade connection is not available.

• For cascade connection, “Broadcast Mode” can be set to “Voice Activate” mode only during communication. The “Split” and “Split (fixed)” modes are not available.

• Only the PCS-XG80/XG80S is enabled for use as a main terminal on the remote site.

Using the Cascade Connection via LAN (Up to 10 Points)

Notes

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

186 Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Page 187: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Installing the optional PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in an HD Visual Communication System allows you to connect to multiple systems up to six by using the optional PCSA-B768S, or up to four by using the optional PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit.

Notes on the number of ISDN lines used and number of remote parties for a multipoint connectionYou can select the number of ISDN channels to be used for the remote point connected first using “ISDN Bandwidth” on the ISDN: Mode page of the Communication setup menu (page 68).However, if the number of remote points connected increases as a result ofdialing from the main terminal, some of the channels used for the first pointwill be cut off and used for newly connected points instead. For example,if you use six ISDN lines (up to 12B channels available), 12B channels will beused for the first remote point only when no other points are connected. Whenthe system connects to a second point, the number of channels for the firstpoint decreases, and 6B channels will be used for both the first and secondpoints.Even if one of the remote points in a multipoint connection is disconnected, thenumber of channels used for the remaining points will not increase.

Using the ISDN Connection

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

The illustration shows an example using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

PCSA-B384 or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit

to ISDN1 to 6

to ISDN lines ISDN modular cables (not supplied)

187Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Page 188: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

When you are called from a remote party and the remote party has set up a lower number of ISDN channels than that in your terminal, the setting on the remote party’s terminal has priority.

To connect with a normal phoneWhen you are using an ISDN connection, a normal phone can be connected atup to five points.Only the 1B (64K) connection is available for a normal phone.

• When using the ISDN connection, installing the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in two or more Communication Systems does not allow cascade connection.

• For multipoint connection, only the Communication System with the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software installed can be used as main terminal. If you want to use two or more Communication Systems as main terminals depending on the type of connection, the same number of HD MCU software installations as that of main terminals is required.

Installing the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in one HD Visual Communication System enables a multipoint connection with the terminals connected via a LAN and ISDN.

Note

Notes

Using Both LAN and ISDN

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

The illustration shows an example using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

to 1 or 2 (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)

PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit

to ISDN1 to 6

ISDN modular cables (not supplied)

to ISDN lines

UTP cable (category 5, straight) (not supplied)

to LAN

188 Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Page 189: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

The connection example described above includes four terminals via a LAN connection and one terminal via an ISDN connection. The number of the systems for LAN and those for ISDN connections is not fixed.

Installing the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software in two HD Visual Communication System enables cascade connection including two main terminals. Connecting four terminals to one main terminal allows you to make a multipoint connection via a LAN and ISDN with up to ten points.

• Be sure to use LAN connection between two Communication Systems connected with cascade. Cascade connection via an ISDN is not available.

• For cascade connection, “Broadcast Mode” can be set to “Voice Activate” mode only during communication. The “Split” and “Split (fixed)” modes are not available.

• Only the PCS-XG80/XG80S is enabled for use as a main terminal on the remote site.

Note

Using the LAN Cascade and ISDN Connection

Notes

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

/

POWER/STANDBY

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

LAN

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

189Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection

Page 190: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Installing the MCU Software1 Turn off the power of the Communication System.

2 Insert the Key Module of the PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software into the TABLET connector.

3 Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the System to turn it on.The PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software is installed in the System.

The installed software is indicated in “Software Option” under the Machine Information page of the Machine Status menu.

For details, see “Machine Information” on page 93.

Confirming that the Installation of the Software is Complete

to TABLET

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU software

Machine Information

CancelPrevious Save

Host Version 2.00

Machine Status > Machine Information

Software Option

Option I/F

Host Name

IP Address

IP Address(LAN2)

Multipoint

None

pcshost

0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

MAC Address 00-1A-80-78-6F-C8

MAC Address(LAN2) 00-1A-80-78-6F-C9

Serial Number 4294967295

190 Installing the MCU Software

Page 191: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Configuring Multipoint

1 Open the Multipoint setup menu, set “Multipoint Mode” to “AUTO”, and make the necessarysettings.

For details on “Broadcast Mode” and “Split”, see “Using the Display Control” on page 200.

2 Open the Communication setup menu and make the necessary settings.

For details, see “Communication Setup Menu” on page 66.

You can register a multipoint connection list that includes all remote parties for a multipoint connection in the Phone Book. It allows you to dial all the parties simultaneously.You can enter new remote parties to register in the multipoint connection list or add the parties registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint connection list.

Setting Up Multipoint

Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List

Setup Multipoint

Multipoint Mode

Broadcast Mode

Split

Split

AUTO

Automatic

CancelSave

Multipoint

Setup Communication IP

Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception

Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint Off

Off

CancelSave

Communication1

191Configuring Multipoint

Page 192: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To register a multipoint connection list in the Phone Book

The basic procedure for registration is the same as when registering a remote party for a point-to-point connection. For details on the procedure, see “Registering a New Remote Party” on page 120.

1 Select “New Entry” in the Phone Book to display the List Edit menu, then enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.

2 Select “Number of Connected Sites” and select the number of sites to which you want to connect.The “Dial to:” text boxes that correspond to the selected numbers of sites are displayed.

3 Select the line interface icon or a still image to be displayed in the Phone Book.You can select “ ” as an icon for a multipoint connection list.

4 Set up the line interface of the remote parties you want to register in a multipoint connection list in the “Dial to:” text boxes.Select the line interface from the drop-down list on the left, and enter the number of a remote party in the text box.For LAN connection: Select “IP” from the drop-down list (when using the

1 connector), and enter the IP address.For ISDN connection: Select “ISDN” from the drop-down list, and enter

the line number.For ISDN (Telephone) connection: Select “TEL” from the drop-down

list, and enter the telephone number. (ex. : 0390123456).

Phone Book

Group Select

One-Touch Dial Specified

Number of Connected Sites

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Number of Lines

Dial to:

Index

IP

None Specified

None Specified

1

IP

1024Kbps

28(128K)

CancelSave

MULTI LIST

Phone Book

Group Select

One-Touch Dial Specified

Number of Connected Sites

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Number of Lines

Dial to:

Index

IP

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

None Specified

None Specified

3

IP

1024Kbps

28(128K)

CancelSave

MULTI LIST

192 Configuring Multipoint

Page 193: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Enter all the parties to which you want to make a multipoint connection.

5 Set up other items.

For details on the setup, see step 3 in “Registering a New Remote Party” on page 121.

6 Select “Save”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.Registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.

To specify a remote party registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint connection list

1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the nameyou want to register in the multipoint connection list.

2 Press the button on the Remote Commander. Or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “ On”, then press the ENTER button.

The (multipoint) mark is added to the lower right of the selected list, and the remote party is registered in the multipoint connection list.

You can add the marks to up to five parties using the same procedure asabove. The marks that correspond to the number of the parties you have registered appear as dark marks on the upper right of the Phone Book.

Phone Book

Group Select

One-Touch Dial Specified

Number of Connected Sites

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Number of Lines

Dial to:

Index

IP

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

None Specified

None Specified

3

IP

1024Kbps

28(128K)

CancelSave

MULTI LIST

123.123.123.1

123.123.123.2

123.123.123.3

Multipoint

Default Group

Phone Book

Room 101ISDN 01-2345-6789

Cancel

Connect

Edit

Copy

Delete

On

193Configuring Multipoint

Page 194: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

To delete the mark from the name list, press the button on the Remote Commander again, or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “ Off”, then press the ENTER button.

3 Select one of the remote parties with the mark, then press the ENTER button.

4 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “ Edit” from the submenu, then press the ENTER button.The List Edit menu appears. All the IP addresses or telephone numbers of the parties marked with are entered in the number text boxes.

5 Enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.

6 Select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.

Note

Default Group

Phone Book

Office ARoom 102Room 101ISDN 98-7654-3210IP 255.255.255.255ISDN 01-2345-6789

Number of specified points

Multipoint mark

Phone Book

Group Select

One-Touch Dial Specified

Number of Connected Sites

Line I/F

Communication Bit Rate

Number of Lines

Dial to:

Index

ISDN

Dial to: IP

Dial to: ISDN

None Specified

None Specified

3

IP

1024Kbps

28(128K)

CancelSave

MULTI LIST

01-2345-6789

255.255.255.255

98-7654-3210

194 Configuring Multipoint

Page 195: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Starting a Multipoint Connection

To call remote parties registered in the multipoint connection lists

1 Select the multipoint connection list registered in the Phone Book.

2 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “Connect”, then press the ENTER button.

The system begins dialing the remote parties registered in the multipoint connection list. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen. When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties are displayed on the screen.

To call remote parties by selecting from the Phone Book

1 Select a remote party to which you want to connect for a multipoint connection from the Phone Book.

2 Press the button on the Remote Commander, or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “ On”, then press the ENTER button.

Calling Remote Parties

Default Group

Phone Book

Room 101ISDN 01-2345-6789

Multipoint

Cancel

Edit

Copy

Delete

On

Connect

195Starting a Multipoint Connection

Page 196: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The (multipoint) mark is added to the lower right of the selected name in the Phone Book list and the remote party is specified to the party for the multipoint connection.You can add the marks for up to five parties using the same procedure as above. The marks that correspond to the number of the parties you have selected appear as dark marks on the upper right of the Phone Book.

To delete the mark from the name list, press the button on the Remote Commander again, or press the ENTER button to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “ Off”, then press the ENTER button.

3 Select one of the remote parties with the mark.

4 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “Connect”, then press the ENTER button.The system begins dialing the remote parties with the marks. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties are displayed on the screen.

Note

Default Group

Phone Book

Room 101ISDN 01-2345-6789

Cancel

Connect

Edit

Copy

Delete

On

Default Group

Phone Book

Office ARoom 102Room 101ISDN 98-7654-3210IP 255.255.255.255ISDN 01-2345-6789

Number of specified points

Multipoint mark

196 Starting a Multipoint Connection

Page 197: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

To call remote parties not registered in the Phone Book

Basic operations are the same as those for a point-to-point connection.

For details, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book” on page 114.

1 Select “Detailed Dial” in the Home menu or press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander to open the Detailed Dial menu.

2 Select “Number of Connected Sites” and select the number of the points to which you want to connect.The “Dial to:” text boxes that correspond to the selected number of points appear.

3 Set up the line interface of the remote parties in the “Dial to:” text boxes.Select the line interface from the drop-down list on the left, and enter the number of a remote party in the text box.For LAN connection: Select “IP” from the drop-down list (when using the

1 connector), and enter the IP address.For ISDN connection: Select “ISDN” from the drop-down list, and enter

the line number.For ISDN (Telephone) connection: Select “TEL” from the drop-down

list, and enter the telephone number (ex. : 0390123456).

Enter all the parties with which you want to make a multipoint connection.

For details on the setup, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book” on page 114.

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

Detailed Dial

Phone Book

Home

CancelHistory

2Mbps

IPLine I/F

Communication Bit Rate

3Number of Connected Sites

1B(64K)Number of Lines

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

Dial to: IP

123.123.123.1

123.123.123.2

123.123.123.3

Detailed Dial

Phone Book

Home

CancelHistory

2Mbps

IPLine I/F

Communication Bit Rate

3Number of Connected Sites

1B(64K)Number of Lines

197Starting a Multipoint Connection

Page 198: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

4 Select “Connect”, and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander, or press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.The system begins dialing the remote parties selected in step 3. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties are displayed on the screen.

To call additional remote parties

After starting communication with the first party, press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander to display the menu.

Call the second remote party by using one of the procedures described in “Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party” on page 106 depending on the registration status of the party. When you press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander after the communication starts with the second remote party, the above menu opens again and you can call the next party.

• When “Direct Dial” or “One-Touch Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup menu, selecting “Previous” from the above menu displays the necessary items for direct dialing or the one-touch dial buttons on the monitor screen.

• The Phone Book opens when you press the button during communication. It is convenient for calling a remote party registered in the Phone Book.

If some points are not connected

The following dialog appears. Only the connected points are shown as dark circles. Select the desired item.

Notes

Select from History

Previous

Enter Number/Address

Select from Phone Book

198 Starting a Multipoint Connection

Page 199: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Start Meeting: Starts communication with remote parties connected.Disconnect All: Cancels all the connections and restores the Home menu.Redial: Redials the numbers of the points that you failed to connect.

Note on multipoint videoconferences using ISDN

If the number of remote points connected increases as a result of dialing from the main terminal while making a multipoint connection using ISDN, some of the channels that have been used for connection will be cut off and used for the newly connected points instead. For example, if you use six ISDN lines (up to 12B channels available), 12B channels will be used for the first remote point only when no other points are connected. When the system connects to a second point, the number of channels for the first point decreases, and 6B channels will be used for both the first and second points.Even if one of the remote points in a multipoint connection is disconnected, the number of channels used for the remaining points will not increase.

Operations are the same as those for a point-to-point connection.

For details, see “Receiving a Call from a Remote Party” on page 117.

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

Disconnect All

Start Meeting

Redial

Some positions were not connected.

199Starting a Multipoint Connection

Page 200: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Using the Display ControlDuring a multipoint connection you can control the following operations.

There are four broadcast modes, “Split” and “Voice Activate”, and “Split (fixed)” and the broadcast select mode.You can set up “Split” and “Voice Activate” modes in “Broadcast Mode” of the Multipoint setup menu.You can select “Split (fixed)” and broadcast select modes in the Layout menu during communication.

Split modeThis mode allows display of the pictures of the connected remote terminals and the picture of the local terminal by splitting the monitor screen.You can select “Six-screen Mosaic” or “Automatic” in “Split” of the Multipoint setup menu. When “Six-screen Mosaic” is selected, the display is split into six regardless of the number of terminals. When “Automatic” is selected, the display is automatically split into four if two or three terminals are connected or into six when four or five terminals are connected.

The split windows A to C or A to E display the pictures of the remote terminals in the connected sequence.

• When the six-split window is displayed, the system detects the terminal including the loudest voice among all the terminals and displays the picture of that terminal in the lower right window. The picture on the local terminal is then displayed in the window where the picture of the detected terminal was displayed.

Broadcast Mode

Notes

Four-split window Six-split window

Picture A Picture B

Picture on the local terminal

Picture C

Picture A Picture B Picture C

Picture D

Picture E

Picture on the local terminal

200 Using the Display Control

Page 201: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

• If you switch the broadcast mode from “Split” to “Voice Activate” in which the picture of a specified terminal is displayed in full screen during communication, the location of Pictures A to E will be changed when “Split” mode is restored.

• When there is one terminal, the picture is displayed in full screen regardless of the setting.

• When the six-split window with a terminal specified is displayed, the picture from the specified terminal is always displayed in the lower-right window.

• When “Split” mode is selected, you cannot control the camera on any connected remote terminals.

Voice Activate modeThis mode allows you to detect the terminal with the loudest voice among the connected terminals and to display the picture of that terminal in full screen on all other terminals. The “ ” indicator appears when “Voice Activate” mode is activated. The indicator with an alphabetic letter (ex. : ) indicating the terminal of the displayed picture also appears. The indicator is displayed on the monitor screen while the local picture is broadcast.

To transmit pictures with resolution of 720p (1280 × 720 pixels) in H.264 Video Mode when “Voice Activate” is activated, select “Voice Activate (720P)” in “Broadcast Mode” of the Multipoint setup menu. However, the “Voice Activate (720P)” mode cannot be selected when the communication is made via an ISDN or SIP connection. Even for an IP connection, this mode is not available if the remote party does not support H.264 Video Mode.

Fixed split modeThe pictures from the connected remote terminals and the picture of the local terminal are displayed in split windows on the monitor screen as the same manner as those in “Split” mode.You can specify a picture among the split windows to fix it in the lower right window for the six-split mode. Pictures other than the specified one are displayed in the split windows in the connected sequence.

Broadcast select modeYou can specify a terminal to display the picture of that terminal in full screen on all other terminals. The indicator with an alphabetic letter (ex. )

Note

The picture of the specified terminal is always displayed in this window.

Six-split window

201Using the Display Control

Page 202: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

indicating the terminal of the displayed picture also appears. The indicator is displayed on the monitor screen while the local picture is broadcast.

The chart described below shows the window displayed on the monitor screen when you select one of the broadcast modes. According to the connection status of your system, some modes cannot be selected. You cannot select the broadcast mode if your connection status corresponds to that with no display window in the chart below.

Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows

Connection status Non-cascade connection Cascade connection

LAN connection (page 185)ISDN connection (page 187)LAN & ISDN connection (page 189)

LAN cascade connection(page 186)LAN cascade & ISDN connection (page 189)

Connecting points (max.) 6 10

Automatic 2 or 3 terminals connected

Four-split window –

4 or 5 terminals connected

Six-split window –

Six-screen Mosaic Six-screen mosaic –

Broa

dcas

t mod

e

Befo

re c

omm

unic

atio

n

202 Using the Display Control

Page 203: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Split (fixed)

2 or 3 terminals connected

– –

4 or 5 terminals connected

Six-split window –

Voice Activate Full screen Full screen

Broadcast Select Full screen –

Connection status Non-cascade connection Cascade connection

Broa

dcas

t mod

e

Durin

g co

mm

unic

atio

n

203Using the Display Control

Page 204: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

At the beginning of the connection, the broadcast mode set in “Broadcast Mode” and “Split” of the Multipoint setup menu is applied. You can change the mode during communication using the Layout menu.

If “Broadcast Mode” of the Multipoint setup menu is set to “Voice Activate (720P)”, you cannot switch “Broadcast Mode” during communication as the “Broadcast Mode” does not appear in the Layout menu. Set “Broadcast Mode” before starting communication.

1 Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander.The Layout menu appears.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the mode to which you want to switch from “Broadcast Mode”, then press the ENTER button.

Split: Selects the Split mode.Split (A fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected first in the

specified window of the fixed split mode.Split (B fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected second in the

specified window of the fixed split mode.Split (C fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected third in the

specified window of the fixed split mode.Split (D fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected fourth in the

specified window of the fixed split mode.

Switching the Broadcast Mode

Note

0Terminal

PandPFull

Layout

Screen Display Patterns

Side by Side

Save Cancel

HDMI RGB HDMI+RGB

PinP

PinPPinPPinPPinP

Split

Monitor Select Mode

Broadcast Mode

204 Using the Display Control

Page 205: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Split (E fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected fifth in the specified window of the fixed split mode.

Split (Near End Fixed): Fixes the local picture in the specified window of the fixed split mode.

Voice Activate: Selects “Voice Activate” mode.Self Broadcast: Broadcasts the local picture in broadcast select mode.A Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected first in

broadcast select mode.B Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected second in

broadcast select mode.C Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected third in

broadcast select mode.D Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fourth in

broadcast select mode.E Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fifth in

broadcast select mode

To display the local picture in “Voice Activate” mode

You can display the local picture only on your monitor screen even if “Voice Activate” mode is activated. All other terminals remain in “Voice Activate” mode.

1 Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander to display the Layout menu.The instruction “F1: Switches the monitored picture between the remote and local sites.” appears in the lower part of the screen.

2 Press the F1 button on the Remote Commander.The local picture appears on your monitor screen.

To restore “Voice Activate” mode on the local sitePress the F1 button on the Remote Commander again.

When you receive the “Self Broadcast” command from one of the terminals connected, the picture of that terminal is broadcast in full screen.When you receive the “Stop Broadcast” command from one of the terminals connected, the system returns to the previous mode.

If you have received the “Self Broadcast” command from another terminal, the operation above will not be carried out.

Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Another Terminal

Note

205Using the Display Control

Page 206: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Ending the Multipoint Connection1 Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.

The following menu appears:

The alphabetic letters A to E (or A to C) indicate the connected sequence of terminals.The terminal names are displayed in the menu if you set “Display Terminal Name” to “Show temporarily” or “Always show” on the Menu Screens page in the General setup menu.

2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the terminal to be disconnected, then press the ENTER button.Disconnect A: Disconnects the terminal connected first.Disconnect B: Disconnects the terminal connected second.Disconnect C: Disconnects the terminal connected third.Disconnect D: Disconnects the terminal connected fourth.Disconnect E: Disconnects the terminal connected fifth.Disconnect All: Disconnects all the terminals.

The selected terminal is disconnected.You can also disconnect all the terminals by pressing the DISCONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.

To cancel the disconnectionSelect “Cancel” in step 2, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

Cancel

Disconnect A Disconnect B

Disconnect All

Disconnect C

Disconnect D

Disconnect E

206 Ending the Multipoint Connection

Page 207: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

Notes on Secondary Terminals

If there is a terminal that is not adequate for the settings set by this system, that terminal is called a secondary terminal.Communication capabilities between secondary terminal and this system are shown below.• Transmitting/receiving audio• Receiving video from a secondary

terminal• Disables transmission of video to a

secondary terminal

For details on secondary terminals, see “Glossary” on page 250.

When a normal phone is connectedThe audio mode of the Visual Communication Systems is not affected if a normal phone is connected or disconnected at any time.

When a 56K network is mixed among the terminals if the connection is made via a 64K networkThe connection automatically changes to that via the 56 K network. Terminals that cannot change to that network are regarded as secondary terminals, and the transmission of video is not available, although transmission/reception of audio and reception of video are available.

When a terminal with different audio mode is connected and its video bit rate is differentThe connection is made in the audio mode of the terminal with the lowest video bit rate. Any terminal that cannot conform to the audio mode is regarded as a secondary terminal, and the transmission of video is not available, although transmission/reception of audio and reception of video are available.

207Notes on Secondary Terminals

Page 208: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Multipoint Attributes

Number Attribute Value (H.320 MCU) Value (H.323 MCU)

1 Maximum number of terminals that can be connected to a single MCU

5 (6 when including the local terminal)

5 (6 when including the local terminal)

2 Maximum number of concurrent (independent) connections that can be supported in a single MCU

1 1

3 Maximum number of ports that can be connected to other MCUs

0 1

4.1 Network interfaces at each port BRI LAN

4.2 Restricted network capability Restrict_Required –

5 Transmission rates available at each port

1B, 2B, 4B, 6B (BRI) Restricted on maximum value of total bit rate of all points

6 Audio Processor Equipped Equipped

6.1 Mixed/switched Noise/echo suppression on “silent” ports

MixedNo

MixedNo

6.2 Audio algorithm at each port G.711, G.728, G.722, MPEG4 AAC (monaural only)

G.711, G.728, G.722, MPEG4 AAC (monaural only)

7 Video Processor (motion pictures)

Equipped Equipped

7.1 Switched/mixed Voice activated/four-split/six-split/user control

Voice activated/four-split/six-split/user control

7.2 Video algorithm at each port H.261, H.263, H.264 H.261, H.263, H.264

8 Data Processor Equipped Equipped

8.1 Data broadcast facility, LSDData broadcast facility, HSD

EquippedNo

––

8.2 MLP Processor Equipped –

9 Encryption Support Support

208 Multipoint Attributes

Page 209: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 6: M

ultipoint Connection

10 Method of choosing Selected Communication Mode - SCM

Custom:Number of lines (1B/2B/4B/6B)Audio algorithm (G.711, G.728, G.722, MPEG4 AAC)

Auto:Video frame rate (7.5/10/15/30fps)Video encoding mode (CIF/QCIF)

Fixed or switched automatically:

Video algorithm (H.261 fixed, H.261, H.263 or H.264 switched automatically)Restrict (56K fixed/Auto)

Custom: LAN bandwidth (Restricted on maximum value of total bit rate of all points)

Audio algorithm (G.711, G.728, G.722, MPEG4 AAC)

Auto:Video frame rate (7.5/10/15/30fps)Video encoding mode (CIF/QCIF)

Fixed or switched automatically:

Video algorithm (H.261 fixed, H.261, H.263 or H.264 switched automatically)

11 Capability of secondary terminals

Capable of audio transmitting/receiving and video receiving only.Capable of audio transmitting/receiving only via a normal phone.

Capable of audio transmitting/receiving and video receiving only.Capable of audio transmitting/receiving only via a normal phone.

12 Call setup provision(s) No call/receive reservation

No call/receive reservation

13 Control capabilities – –

13.1 Numbering of terminalsSimple chair control using BAS

NoNo

EquippedNo

13.2 MLP facilities (T.120) No No

13.3 H.224 (simplex data) Equipped Equipped

14 Cascading No Equipped

14.1 Fixed rates (“simple”) No No

14.2 Master/Slave No Equipped

15 Terminal identification No Equipped

16 MBE capability No –

Number Attribute Value (H.320 MCU) Value (H.323 MCU)

209Multipoint Attributes

Page 210: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This chapter describes the Web Control Functions used when operating the PCS-XG80/XG80S. The Web Control Function helps you control the PCS-XG80/XG80S, or change its setup configuration, using a Web browser installed on your PC, such as Internet Explorer.

Internet Explorer is a product of the Microsoft Corporation. Please use Version 5.0, or above (Version 6.0 recommended).

Chapter 7: Web Control Function

210

Page 211: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

Opening the Web PageEnter the IP address assigned to the PCS-XG80/XG80S in the address line of your browser.The format of an address is:http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/

For instance, if the IP address is “192.47.100.117”, enter “http://192.47.100.117/” in the address line.

When a proxy server in an external network segment has been set, the Gateway address in the PCS-XG80/XG80S LAN setup must also be set. Or set your Web browser proxy setting to “No Proxy” for the PCS-XG80/XG80S.

Note

211Opening the Web Page

Page 212: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Identifying a UserOnce you reach the Web page, the following window will be displayed asking you to identify yourself as the user.

Enter one of the following user names (see below) into the “User Name” box and the corresponding password into the “Password” box, then click the [OK] button.Each character of a password is shown as “*” on the screen. When the user name and password are correct, the “Home” menu will come up. If an incorrect user name or password is entered, you are asked to enter it again. When the incorrect entries are made three times, an error message appears on the screen.

You can select a user name from the following and enter the password for the selected user name.

[remote]Enter the Remote Access Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You can access and check the “Phonebook” and “Setup” pages.

[address]Enter the Phone Book Modification Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You can access the “Phonebook” page, change the setting of the page, and register a new entry onto the page. And you can check the “Setup” pages.

[sonypcs]Enter the Administrator Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You can access the “Phonebook” page, change the setting of the page, and register a new entry onto the page. And you can check and modify the “Setup” pages.

212 Identifying a User

Page 213: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

[streaming]Enter the Streaming Broadcast Password of the terminal transmitting via streaming broadcast. You can receive and view the contents of the transmitted communication.

[setting]Enter the Save Settings Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You can access the “Phonebook” page, change the setting of the page, and register a new entry onto the page. And you can check and modify the “Setup” pages other than the Administrator setup menu.

• If the corresponding password is not assigned, leave the “Password” box blank and click the [OK] button.

• Administrator Password, Phone Book Modification Password, Save Settings Password, Remote Access Password and Streaming Broadcast Password settings are set in the Administrator setup menu.

Notes

213Identifying a User

Page 214: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Selecting a MenuBy clicking a menu name on the left part of the page, you can display the corresponding menu page.

[Home]Displays the “Home” menu to select the line I/F to connect to a remote party, enter the address of the remote party and dial. The information icons for this system are also displayed.

[Download]Displays the “Download” menu to download logs.

[Control Pad]Displays the control panel to control the system.

[Remote Controller]Displays the image of the Remote Commander (PCS-RF1) supplied with the system. It allows you to perform the same operations as those on the Remote Commander.

Menu items

214 Selecting a Menu

Page 215: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

How to Use [Home] MenuWhen you click [Home] on the left part of the page, the Home menu appears. You can also display the Home menu by entering the correct password on the name entry screen.

To dial by entering a number

1 Select the line interface (IP, ISDN or SIP).2 Enter the telephone number or address of a remote party into the text box.3 Click the [Connect] button.

215How to Use [Home] Menu

Page 216: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

How to Use [Download] MenuWhen you click [Download] on the left part of the page, the Download menu appears.Various log files can be shown.

Select the log file you want to display, and click the [Download] button. You can check the log files in a separate window.

216 How to Use [Download] Menu

Page 217: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

How to Use [Remote Commander] MenuWhen you click [Remote Commander] on the left part of the screen, the Remote Commander image appears.

By clicking the various buttons on the Remote Commander image, you can control the system in the same way you can when using a real Remote Commander (PCS-RF1), operating the camera, and dialing phone numbers.

217How to Use [Remote Commander] Menu

Page 218: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Selecting a ToolBy clicking the tools button on the top part of the page, you can jump to the corresponding tools page.

[Connect/Disconnect]Calls a remote party using direct dialing and ends a communication.

[Phonebook]Displays the dial list of the Phonebook.Connects from the Phonebook.Registers, confirms, or edits the dial list.

For a private phone book, the “Phonebook” button changes to the “Private Phonebook” button.

[Shared Phonebook]You can use the Shared Phone Book.

[History]Displays the Dial, Answer and Missed Call history lists.Dials from the history.Deletes an unnecessary history record.

[Setup]Confirms or modifies the setup.

[Information]Confirms the machine information, peripheral status and communication mode.You can also check the network routing, and can display the recorded files in a “Memory Stick”.

[Monitor]You can monitor the picture on the Communication System.

When “Web Monitor” is set to “Off” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu, you cannot use the [Monitor] page.

[Streaming]You can watch the live stream of a communication.

• QuickTime version 6.0 or above is needed to view a communication.• When “Streaming” is “Disabled” on the Streaming/Recording page of the

Administrator setup menu, the communication cannot be watched. If “Video” is set to “Off” on the Streaming/Recording page, only the audio stream of the communication is broadcast, and video cannot be watched.

Note

Notes

218 Selecting a Tool

Page 219: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

How to Use [Version Up] PageWhen you click [Setup] on the top part of the page, [Version Up] appears on the lower left of the page. Clicking [Version Up] displays the [Version Up] page.

Click [Reference] and select the software you want to upgrade, then click the [Upload] button.When the version upgrade is complete and a message appears, reboot the Communication System.

Version Up

219How to Use [Version Up] Page

Page 220: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

How to Use [Streaming] Page1 On the user name entry screen, enter “streaming” in the [User Name] box

and the Streaming Password of the terminal transmitting via streaming broadcast in the [Password] box.

2 Click the [Streaming] button to start QuickTime and start watching a communication.

• QuickTime version 6.0 or above is required to view a communication. If QuickTime is not installed on your computer, download it for free from the following Web site:http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/

• When “Streaming” is “Disabled” on the Streaming/Recording page of the Administrator setup menu, the communication cannot be watched. If “Video” is set to “Off” on the Streaming/Recording page, only the audio stream of the communication is broadcast, and video cannot be watched.

• Depending on Web access limitations, about 10 terminals can view a streaming broadcast simultaneously. The actual number of terminals that can view the broadcast simultaneously depends on your system’s operating environment.

Notes

220 How to Use [Streaming] Page

Page 221: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Chapter 7: W

eb Control F

unction

How to Use [Monitor] Page

When you click [Monitor] of the tools buttons, the [Monitor] page opens. You can monitor the picture on the Communication System.

When “Web Monitor” is set to “Off” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu, or while the encrypted connection is made, you cannot use the [Monitor] page.

Note

221How to Use [Monitor] Page

Page 222: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Front

a ?/1 (power) switchTurns on/off the system.

b ?/1 (power) indicatorStarts blinking in green when the power switch is pressed to on, then lights in green. Lights in orange when the system is set to standby mode.

c LAN 1 ALERT indicatorWhen the system is connected to LAN via the 1 connector on the rear, this indicator lights in yellow when packet error (loss) or link error occurs during communication.

d LAN 2 ALERT indicatorWhen the system is connected to LAN via the 2 connector on the rear, this indicator lights in yellow when packet

error (loss) or link error occurs during communication.

e Communication status indicatorLights in white for several seconds then goes out when the system starts.Blinks while dialing or receiving a call, and the indicator stays lit during communication.

f TABLET connectorConnect to a pen tablet (not supplied) for annotation, or the Key Module (not supplied) for software installation.

g Memory Stick slotInsert a “Memory Stick” (not supplied) into this slot.A “Memory Stick Duo” can also be inserted.

h VIDEO IN YPbPr (component input) jacks (phono jack)Connect to the component (YPbPr) signal outputs of the optional camera or external video equipment.

i AUDIO 2 IN L/R jacks (phono jack)Connect to the audio outputs of the optional camera or audio equipment.

j MAINTENANCE connector (D-sub 9-pin)Used for maintenance service.

Appendix

PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System

OPEN

LAN 1 ALERT LAN 2 ALERT/

OPEN

VIDEO IN AUDIO 2 INMAINTENANCEY Pb Pr L R

1 234 5 6 7

8 9 q;

222 Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 223: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Rear

a CAMERA connectorConnect to the TERMINAL connector on the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit.

b S VIDEO IN connector (mini DIN 7-pin)Connect to the S-video output on the optional second camera or video equipment.

c RGB IN connector (D-sub 15-pin)Connect to the RGB output of the optional computer or video equipment.

d RGB OUT connector (D-sub 15-pin)Connect to the RGB input of the optional projector or display unit.

e HDMI OUT connectorConnect to the HDMI input of the optional TV monitor.

f ISDN UNIT connectorConnect to the TERMINAL connector on the optional PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.

g AUX CONTROL connector (D-sub 9-pin)Used for maintenance service.

h I (ground) terminalConnect a ground wire.

i EC-MIC (A7) 1/2 (Echo canceling microphone) jacksConnect to optional PCSA-A7 echo canceling microphones.

j MIC (A1/A3) 1 (R)/2 (L) jacks (minijack)Connect to the PCS-A1 microphones (supplied with PCS-XG80) or PCSA-A3 microphones (optional). Power is supplied to the microphones from the System.

k AUDIO 1 IN L/R jacks (phono jack)Connect to the audio outputs of the optional VCR or audio equipment.

l AUDIO OUT L/R jacks (phono jack)Connect to the audio inputs of the TV monitor.

m REC OUT L/R connectors (phono jack)Used when recording the audio signals to minute a communication. The mixedsounds of the local and remote parties are output from these connectors.

n EXT (external equipment) 1/2 connectorsNot used with the system of this version.

o 1 (LAN1) connector (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 8-pin modular)Used to connect via a LAN or a SIP. Connect to a hub or a SIP server using the category 5 cable.

p 2 (LAN2) connector (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 8-pin modular)Used to connect via a LAN. Connect to a hub, etc. using the category 5 cable.

q DC 19.5V jackConnect the supplied VGP-AC19V15 AC Power Adaptor.

1 1(R)

(PLUG IN POWER)

2(L)

R L R L R L

2

S VIDEO IN RGB IN RGB OUT HDMI OUT

1-EXT-2REC OUTAUDIO OUTAUDIO 1 IN

AUX CONTROL

2

CAMERA

EC-MIC(A7) MIC(A1/A3)

1DC 19.5V

ISDN UNIT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

qjqg qhqfqdqsqa098

223Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 224: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

This Camera Unit is not supplied with PCS-XG80S.

a LensThis is a 10-magnification optical zoom lens.

b POWER/STANDBY indicatorLights in green when the System is turned on. When the System is set to standby mode or is turned off, it lights in orange.

c TERMINAL connectorConnect to the CAMERA connector on the System.

d Receiver of the RF Remote CommanderPoint the supplied RF Remote Commander at this receiver when pairing with the Camera Unit.

e VISCA OUT connectorUsed for VISCA communications.When a second camera is connected to the System, connect to the VISCA IN connector on the second camera.

f Tripod attachment screw holeUse to attach the camera to a tripod.

For details on the tripod screw, see “Attaching the PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit to a Tripod” on page 35.

g Fixing screw holesUse to fix the camera to a fitting.

h Attachment locations for hook-and-loop padsWhen you use the supplied hook-and-loop pads, stick them to these locations.

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit (Supplied with PCS-XG80)

Note

POWER/STANDBY

1

2

TERMINALVISCA OUT

3

4

5

6

7

8

Front

Rear

Bottom

224 Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 225: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

You can set the volume of beep that sounds by pressing a button on the Remote Commander using the menu. You can also set for the beep not to sound.

For the setting, see “Beep Sound” in the Audio setup menu on page 71.

a PRESENTATION buttonStarts or stops transmission of presentation data.

b F1 to F4 (function) buttonsThe function buttons are used for various operations according to the situation.The current function of the buttons is guided at the bottom of the menu screen.

c LAYOUT button

Displays the Layout menu to select the screen display pattern or monitor select mode.

d VOLUME +/– buttonsAdjust the volume of the sound received from a remote party.+: to increase the volume–: to decrease the volume

e Arrow buttons (V/v/B/b)Used to select the menu or make various settings in the menu.

f ENTER buttonExecutes the selection or setting in the menu and goes to the next step.

g RETURN buttonUsed to return to the previous step.

h CONNECT ( ) buttonUsed to connect a remote party for communication.

i Number (0-9, , ) buttonsUsed to enter the letters or numbers of a telephone number, etc.

j Battery compartment (rear)Insert two size AA (R6) batteries.

k @/1 (power on/off) buttonSets the System to standby mode when it is turned on. Turns on the System when it is in standby.

l VIDEO INPUT buttonDisplays the Video Input menu to switch the video input signal to be displayed on the monitor TV.

m CAMERA buttonDisplays the Camera menu to adjust the camera angle, brightness, etc.

n ZOOM (T/W) buttonsZooms in or out.T: to enlarge the pictureW: to reduce the picture

PCS-RF1 RF Remote Commander (Supplied)

F1 F2 F3 F4

T

W

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

/

RF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ABC DEF

PRESENTATION

LAYOUT

RETURN

CONNECT

ON/OFF

MIC

BACKSPACE DISCONNECT

TONE DOT

TOOLS

VOLUME ZOOM

ENTER

VIDEO INPUT CAMERA

PCS-RF1

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

qa

0

qs

qd

qf

qgqh

qj

qk

225Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 226: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

o TOOLS buttonDisplays the Tools menu.

p DISCONNECT ( ) buttonUsed to disconnect a remote party in communication.

q BACK SPACE buttonDeletes the letter entered last.

r MIC ON/OFF buttonTurns off the local sound to be sent to a remote party. To restore the sound, press the button again.

a POWER indicatorLights in orange when power is supplied to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is complete, blinks in green.

b STATUS 1-3 indicatorsLights in orange when link synchronization of each ISDN connector is established. Lights in yellow when each ISDN line is connected.

c ISDN 1-3 terminals (8-pin modular jack)Connect to the ISDN lines using the ISDN modular cable.

d TERMINAL connectorConnect to the ISDN UNIT connector on the System with the interface cable supplied with the ISDN Unit.

PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional)

Front/Upper panel

Rear

226 Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 227: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

a POWER indicatorLights in orange when power is supplied to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is complete, blinks in green.

b STATUS 1-6 indicatorsLights in orange when link synchronization of each ISDN connector is established. Lights in yellow when each ISDN line is connected.

c ISDN 1-6 terminals (8-pin modular jack)Connect to the ISDN lines using the ISDN modular cable.

d TERMINAL connectorConnect to the ISDN UNIT connector on the System with the interface cable supplied with the ISDN Unit

PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional)

Front/Upper panel

Rear

227Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Page 228: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

IndicatorsThe following icons appear on the monitor depending on the functions being used.

Indicator Name Description

Near camera control

Local camera being controlled

Far camera control

Remote camera being controlled

Mic off (Near)

Local microphone is turned off in communication or not in communication.

Mic off (Far) Remote microphone is turned off in communication or not in communication.

Volume Volume of remote party’s voice being adjusted

Audio level (stereo)

Audio input level of stereo sound

Audio level (monaural)

Audio input level of monaural sound

Character input mode

Character input available

LAN status (LAN1)

LAN connected via the 1 connector using Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4).

LAN status (LAN2)

LAN connected via the 2 connector using IPv4.

LAN status (LAN1, IPv6)

LAN connected via the 1 connector using Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6).

ISDN status Used ISDN ports

Audio input Selected audio input (example of the input from the EC-MIC(A7) connector)

NEAR

NEAR

228 Indicators

Page 229: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Video input Selected video input (example of the video from the S VIDEO IN connector)

1080i 1080i video mode in use

ISDN (telephone) mode

Audio only communication in progress

“Memory Stick”

“Memory Stick” is inserted into the System.

Preset load Recalling the preset camera settings (1-6)

Presentation (transmitting)

Presentation Executing (transmitting the presentation data to a remote party)

Presentation (receiving)

Receiving the presentation data from a remote party

Streaming Stream broadcast in progress

Recording Recording in progress

Tablet Pen tablet connected

Drawing (near)

Drawing rights belong to the local party.

Drawing (far) Drawing rights belong to the remote party.

Pointer (near) Local party’s pointer

Indicator Name Description

229Indicators

Page 230: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Pointer (far) Remote party’s pointer

Encryption Connected with encryption

Packet loss Packet loss occurring

Voice Activate mode

“Voice Activate” is selected in “Broadcast Mode” in a multipoint connection.

Broadcast (Near)

Local picture is broadcast in a multipoint connection.

Broadcast (A-E)

Terminal A (-E) connected first (-fifth) is broadcast in a multipoint connection.

Indicator Name Description

230 Indicators

Page 231: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

On-Screen MessagesCheck the following if a message appears on the TV monitor when operating the Communication System.

Message

Cannot complete connection. (The following code and message appear.)

0 Unknown network error: Try again later.

1 Number does not exist: Check the number and try again.

2 Network congestion: Try again later.

3 Try again later.

16 Normal disconnection: (The line has been disconnected normally.)

17 Line is busy: Try again later.

18,19 System not responding: Check if the remote system is connected.

20 No such subscriber: Confirm the site number.

21 Call rejected: Check if the remote system is connected.

22 Called party number changed: Check the number and try again.

26 Connection restoration request: Try again later.

27 Remote system out of order: Check if the remote system is operational.

28 Invalid number entered: Check the number and try again.

31, 41 – 43, 47Network not available: Try again later.

33, 34Line is busy. Try to dial again later.

44 Network not available: Line is busy. Try again later.

50 Not a Subscriber: Check the remote party’s facility contract.

57,58 Bearer capability not authorized: Check if “Restrict” is set correctly.

70 Restricted capability: Set “Restrict” to “56K” and try again.

88 Terminal attribute error: Check the connection of the remote system.

91, 95 – 102, 111Protocol error: Turn off and restart the system and try again.

128 H.221 negotiation timeout: Restart the system and connect again.

131 Board mismatch: Check the optional line interface boards.

132 Invalid SPID: Reregister the SPID.

134 Physical link synchronization error: Check the connection of the ISDN cable.

144, 145The remote terminal may not be compatible with the BONDING function.

177 LAN connection timeout: Try again later.

231On-Screen Messages

Page 232: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

178 LAN connection rejected: Try again later.

179 DNS error.

180 Dialing your own number is invalid.

181 GateKeeper error.

192 PPPoE server admission has failed. Check the PPPoE User Name and Password are entered correctly.

195 Now obtaining an IP address via DHCP.

196 Configure the DNS address or use the IP address to dial.

205 Check the user name or user number for dialing is correct.

207 The remote terminal may not be registered in gatekeeper. Contact the gatekeeper administrator.

209 – 212Gatekeeper does not respond. Contact the gatekeeper administrator, or use the IP address to dial.

201, 217Call not responded.

218 Local number is not set correctly in the ISDN Setup menu. Set it correctly. Line connected with 1B (64K).

219 Local number setting for ISDN configuration may not be correct in the remote party. Line connected with 1B (64K).

230, 231PPPoE server admission fails. Dial again after confirmation of the PPPoE settings.

232 Access to the DNS server has failed. Check the PPPoE DNS settings.

233 Connection to the remote party via DNS disabled. Dial using IP address.

234 Dialing the same address is invalid.

235 Regarded as a secondary terminal as the number of lines for ISDN configuration is different.

236 Regarded as a secondary terminal as Far End Camera Control is set to Off.

237 Check the line interface or the IP address is set correctly.

238 The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the near-end side was disabled.

239 The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the far-end side was disabled.

240 The conference could not start because the signal encryption method at the near-end side differed from that of the far-end side.

241 The standard encryption videoconference with SIP connection is not available.

242 The Proprietary encryption videoconference with ISDN connection is not available.

243 Connection with the current communication mode is not available via the specified line interface.

244 Disconnected due to failure to receive packet from remote site.

Message

232 On-Screen Messages

Page 233: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

TroubleshootingIf the Communication System does not function correctly, check the following.

Symptom Cause Solution

The power is not turned on.

The power switch is not set to on. Press the power switch to turn on the power of the system (page 40).

The batteries in the Remote Commander are low or dead.

Replace the batteries with new ones (page 36).

The Remote Commander does not operate.

It is isolated from the communication system.

Perform pairing of the Remote Commander with the Camera (page 37).

Pairing with the Remote Commander fails.

Perform pairing of the Remote Commander with the System or Camera Unit (page 37).

No sound or the volume is very low.

The volume of the system is too low.

Adjust the sound volume by pressing the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander (page 43).

The volume of the TV monitor is too low.

Adjust the volume of the TV monitor.

The microphone on the remote party is turned off.

Ask the remote party to turn on the microphone.

Audio input is not selected properly.

• Set up “Input Select (MIC)” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu properly (page 70).

• Set up “Audio Input” properly on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup menu (page 70).

The microphone or external equipment is not connected correctly.

Check the connection (pages 164, 167 and 172).

Picture is blurred. Manual focus is selected but picture remains blurred.

Adjust the focus (page 140).

When auto focus is selected, the background is too bright, contrast is too high, or the background or the participants’ clothes contain fine line patterns.

Select manual focus and adjust manually (page 140).

233Troubleshooting

Page 234: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

No picture. The selected picture source is not tuned on.

Turn on the selected video equipment.

Video input is not selected properly. Select the video input properly (page 142).

The selected picture source is not correctly connected to the system.

Check the connections (page 172).

A voice meeting is held. This is not a malfunction.

Movement of the camera is prevented.

Turn off the system, then turn it on again.

No connection. Wrong number was dialed. Check the entered number.

The setting of “Line I/F” is not correct (when using direct dialing).

Set “Line I/F” to correct interface referring to “Calling a Remote Party” (page 108).

The registered items in the Phone Book are not correct.

Register the party correctly referring to “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” (page 120).

Some of the system settings are not correct.

Set the system settings correctly referring to “Registering Local Information” (page 60).

The IP address and network mask are not set correctly (when using LAN).

Ask the system administrator to set them correctly (page 74).

The LAN cable is connected to the 2 connector.

Set “Use LAN2” to “On” in the Line I/F setup menu (page 64).Some of the functions are restricted when connecting the LAN cable to the 2 connector. SIP connection, use of gatekeeper and SNMP, and Web and Telnet accesses are not available.

The LAN or ISDN cable is disconnected.

Connect correctly (pages 32, 33).

The LAN or ISDN cable is connected to the incorrect connector.

Connect correctly (pages 32, 33).

The LAN or ISDN cable is down. Replace the cable with a new one.

The cable exclusively designed for the ISDN connection is used for LAN connection (when using LAN).

Use the cable for LAN connection.

Incorrect type of cable (cross or straight cable) is used for the LAN or ISDN connection.

Use the correct type of cable.

The DSU is turned off (when using ISDN).

Turn on the DSU.

Symptom Cause Solution

234 Troubleshooting

Page 235: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

No connection. If you disconnect the communication with an abnormal procedure, e.g., unplugging an ISDN cable or turning off the system during communication, you may not connect to the ISDN line for a while (when using ISDN).

Turn off the power of the system and wait for a few minutes before turning it on again.

If you repeat plugging/unplugging or turning on/off, you may not connect to the network for a while (when using LAN).

Turn off the power of the system and wait for a few minutes before turning it on again.

LAN connection timeout (when using LAN).

Try again later.

Packet for communication is not acceptable under the current LAN environment (when using LAN).

Consult with the system administrator so that the packet for Communication becomes acceptable under your LAN environment.

The remote terminal is not turned on.

Ask the remote party to turn on the terminal.

It takes a long time for the remote party to be able to answer from the standby mode.

Ask the remote party to cancel the standby mode.

The remote party is in communication with another party.

Call the remote party after they end the communication with another party.

Answering the call is not permitted by the remote terminal as it is operating for setups, etc.

Ask the remote party to permit answering a call.

The remote terminal is not set to auto answer mode.

Ask the remote party to set the terminal to auto answer mode, or to answer a call manually.

The ISDN telephone numbers are not set up in the remote terminal (when using bonding).

Ask the remote party to set up “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the ISDN Setup menu correctly (page 79).

The eighth digit and up of the ISDN telephone numbers are not the same when connecting using bonding (when the remote party uses the communication system of an older model such as the PCS-1600).

Connect without using bonding, or use the ISDN telephone numbers that are the same in the eighth digit and up.

There is some problem with the remote terminal.

Try to dial the number of another terminal.

A message appears on the screen. See “On-Screen Messages” (page 231).

Symptom Cause Solution

235Troubleshooting

Page 236: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Still pictures or the Phone Book cannot be saved to the “Memory Stick.”

The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.

Release the lock (page 248).

The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to full capacity.

Use another “Memory Stick.”

Symptom Cause Solution

236 Troubleshooting

Page 237: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Specifications

This unit is compliant with ITU-T Recommendations H.320 and H.323.

Motion pictureOperating bandwidth

64 Kbps to 10 Mbps (standard, LAN connection)

56 Kbps to 768 Kbps (when installing the PCSA-B768S, ISDN connection)

56 Kbps to 384 Kbps (when installing the PCSA-B384S, ISDN connection)

Coding H.261/H.263/H.263+/H.263++/H.264

MPEG4 Simple Profile (when using SIP)

Picture elementsCIF: 352 pixels × 288 linesQCIF: 176 pixels × 144 lines4CIF: 704 pixels × 576 linesWCIF (W288p): 512 pixels × 288

linesW432p: 768 pixels × 432 linesW4CIF: 1024 pixels × 576 lines720p: 1280 pixels × 720 lines1080i: 1920 pixels × 1080 lines

SoundBandwidth 22 kHz (MPEG4 AAC)

14 kHz (MPEG4 AAC)7 kHz (G.722 compliant with

ITU-T Recommendation)3.4 kHz (G.711/G.728 compliant

with ITU-T Recommendation)Transmission rate

56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.711 compliant with ITU-T Recommendation)

48 Kbps, 56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.722 compliant with ITU-T Recommendation)

64 Kbps, 96 Kbps (MPEG4 AAC) (when using LAN)

24 Kbps, 32 Kbps16 Kbps (G.728 compliant with

ITU-T Recommendation)8 Kbps

5.3 Kbps, 6.3 Kbps48 Kbps (MPEG4 AAC) (when

using ISDN)

NetworkMultiplexing

Video, audio, dataFrame format

H.221 (compliant with ITU-T Recommendation)

Interface LAN (standard), 64 Kbps to 10 Mbps

ISDN (BRI), up to 3 lines (when installing the PCSA-B384S) up to 6 lines (when installing the PCSA-B768S)

Data transmission rateLSD 1.2 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 6.4 KbpsMLP 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 KbpsHMLP 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 128

KbpsLAN protocol supported

HTTPTelnetRTP/RTCPTCP/UDP SNMP

Remote controlFar end camera control

H.281 (compliant with ITU-T Recommendation)

GeneralPower requirements

DC 19.5 VCurrent consumption

5 AOperating temperature

5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)Operating humidity

20% to 80%Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)Storage humidity

20% to 80% (no condensation)Dimensions 282 × 56 × 244 mm (W × H × D)

(11 1/8 × 2 1/4 × 9 5/8 inches) (not including projections except for the feet)

Mass Approx. 2.2 kg (4 lb 14 oz)Supplied accessories

PCS-RF1 RF Remote Commander (1)

Size AA (R6) batteries for RF Remote Commander (2)

PCS-XG80/XG80S HD Visual Communication System

237Specifications

Page 238: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

HDMI cable (3 m) (9.8 feet) (1)VGP-AC19V15 AC adaptor (1)Power cord (1)CD-ROM (1)Before Using this Unit (1)Installation Guide (1)Quick Connection Guide/Remote

Commander Guide (1)Important Notice Regarding

Software (1)Warranty booklet (1)

Signal formatCompliant with IEEE802.15.4

Control DC 3V using two size AA (R6) batteries

Power requirements100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz,

1.6 A to 0.7 AOutput DC 19.5 V, 6.2 AOperating temperature

5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)Operating humidity

20% to 80%Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)Storage humidity

20% to 80% (no condensation)Dimensions 155 × 67 × 36.5 mm (W × H × D)

(6 1/8 × 2 3/4 × 1 7/16 inches)(not including projections)

Mass Approx. 550 g (20.5 oz)

PCS-RF1 Remote Commander (Supplied with PCS-XG80/XG80S)

VGP-AC19V15 AC Adaptor (Supplied with PCS-XG80/XG80S)

238 Specifications

Page 239: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Video signal 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50Synchronization

Internal synchronizationImage device 1/3 type (6 mm), CMOS

Effective picture elements: Approx. 2,000,000 pixels

Lens 10× (optical) (40× (digital))f = 3.4 – 33.9 mm, F1.8 – F2.1Horizontal angle: 8 (TELE end) to

70 degrees (WIDE end)Minimum object distance

100 mm (4 inches) (WIDE end)Minimum illumination

15 lux (F1.8) with 50 IREPan/tilt action Horizontal: ±100 degrees

Maximum panning speed: 300 degrees/sec.

Vertical: ±25 degreesMaximum tilting speed: 125

degrees/sec.Input voltage 19.5 V DCCurrent consumption

1 A max.Operating temperature

5ºC to 35ºC (41ºF to 95ºF)Storage temperature

–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to +140ºF)Dimensions 240 × 152 × 173 mm (10 1/4 × 6 ×

6 3/4 inches) (w/h/d) (including the feet)

Mass Approx. 2 kg (4 lb 7 oz)Installation angle

Less than ±15 degrees to the horizontal surface

Supplied accessoriesCamera cable (3 m) (9.8 ft) (1)Hook-and-loop pads (2 sets)Operating Instructions (1)Warranty booklet (1)

Bandwidth 13 kHzDirectional characteristic

OmnidirectionalDimensions 74 × 16 × 93 mm (W × H × D)

(3 × 21/32 × 3 3/4 inches)Mass Approx. 170 g (6 oz)Power Plug in powerCable length 8 m (26.2 ft)

Bandwidth 13 kHzDirectional characteristic

UnidirectionalDimensions 68 × 16 × 96 mm (W × H × D)

(2 3/4 × 21/32 × 3 7/8 inches)Mass Approx. 200 g (7 oz)Power Plug in powerCable length 8 m (26.2 ft)

Dimensions 64 × 26 × 102 mm (W × H × D) (2 5/8 × 11/16 × 41/8 inches) (including the feet)

Mass Approx. 130 g (4.6 oz)Power requirements

DC 12 V, powered by the System or AC adaptor

Power consumptionless than 2.5 W (per microphone)

Operating temperature5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)

Operating humidity20% to 80%

Storage temperature–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Storage humidity20% to 80% (no condensation)

Supplied accessoriesPCSA-A7 Microphone (4)Microphone cable (8 m, 26.3 ft)

(2)Microphone cable (1.5 m, 4.9 ft)

(4)MPA-AC1 AC adaptor (1)Power cord (one for each region:

North America, Europe, Japan)Cord adaptor (1)DC cord (1)Operating Instructions (1)Warranty card (1)

PCSA-CXG80 HD Camera Unit (Supplied with PCS-XG80)

PCS-A1 Microphone (Supplied with PCS-XG80)

PCSA-A3 Microphone (Optional)

PCSA-A7P4 Microphone (Optional)

239Specifications

Page 240: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Power requirementsDC 19.5 V

Current consumption0.3 A

Operating temperature5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)

Operating humidity20% to 80%

Storage temperature–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Storage humidity20% to 80% (no condensation)

Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D) (6 9/16 × 1 3/8 × 5 1/16 inches) (not including projections except for the feet)

Mass Approx. 400 g (14 oz)Supplied accessories

Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)Operating Instructions (1)Warranty booklet (1)

Power requirementsDC 19.5 V

Current consumption0.5 A

Operating temperature5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)

Operating humidity20% to 80%

Storage temperature–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Storage humidity20% to 80% (no condensation)

Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D) (6 9/16 × 1 3/8 × 5 1/16 inches) (not including projections except for the feet)

Mass Approx. 400 g (14 oz)Supplied accessories

Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)Operating Instructions (1)Warranty booklet (1)

Dimensions 72.5 × 11 × 20 mm (W × H × D)(2 7/8 × 7/16 × 13/16 inches)

Mass Approx. 10 g (0.02 oz)Supplied accessories

Serial number seal (1)Operating Instructions (1)

Dimensions 72.5 × 11 × 20 mm (W × H × D)(2 7/8 × 7/16 × 13/16 inches)

Mass Approx. 10 g (0.02 oz)Supplied accessories

Serial number seal (1)Operating Instructions (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional)

PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional)

PCSA-DSG80 HD Data Solution Software (Optional)

PCSA-MCG80 HD MCU Software (Optional)

Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.

Note

240 Specifications

Page 241: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Sales and distribution of MPEG-4 Visual encoders/decodersTHIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR

(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)

AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT

WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.

NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/sales of any storage media

storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4

Visual video information in any manner (such as online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting).

Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEG LA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com

Sales and distribution of MPEG-4 AVC (3-1) encoders/decodersTHIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO

(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)

AND/OR

(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND

NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM

241Specifications

Page 242: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System (RGB OUT)

PCS-XG80S HD Visual Communication System (RGB IN)

Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals

Picture element Signal format fH (kHz) fV (Hz) Sync

1024 × 768 XGA VESA 60 Hz 48.363 60.004 H-neg V-neg

1280 × 1024 SXGA VESA 60 Hz 63.981 60.02 H-pos V-neg

1280 × 768 WXGA VESA 60 Hz

47.776 59.870 H-neg V-pos

Picture element

Signal format fH (kHz) fV (Hz) Sync

640 × 480 VGA mode 3 31.469 59.94 H-neg V-neg

VGA VESA 72 Hz 37.861 72.809 H-neg V-neg

VGA VESA 75 Hz 37.5 75 H-neg V-neg

VGA VESA 85 Hz 43.269 85.008 H-neg V-neg

800 × 600 SVGA VESA 56 Hz 35.156 56.25 H-pos V-pos

SVGA VESA 60 Hz 37.879 60.317 H-pos V-pos

SVGA VESA 72 Hz 48.077 72.188 H-pos V-pos

SVGA VESA 75 Hz 46.875 75 H-pos V-pos

SVGA VESA 85 Hz 53.674 85.061 H-pos V-pos

1024 × 768 XGA VESA 60 Hz 48.363 60.004 H-neg V-neg

XGA VESA 70 Hz 56.476 70.069 H-neg V-neg

XGA VESA 75 Hz 60.023 75.029 H-pos V-pos

XGA VESA 85 Hz 68.667 84.997 H-pos V-pos

1280 × 1024 SXGA VESA 60 Hz 63.981 60.02 H-pos V-pos

Acceptable VIDEO IN (YPbPr) Signals

Picture element Remarks (SMPTE-274M) fH (kHz) fV (Hz)

1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080/59.94/1:1 67.43 59.94

1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080/50/1:1 56.25 50

242 Specifications

Page 243: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T jack

Modular jack

ISDN UNIT connector

USB connector

S VIDEO IN connector

Mini-DIN 7-pin connector

The S-Video input is only available for the Visual Communication System.

CAMERA connector

D-sub 15-pin connector (female)

Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Description

1 TPOPTX+ Transmit+

2 TPONTX– Transmit–

3 TPIPRX+ Receive+

4 NC —

5 NC —

6 TPINRX– Receive–

7 NC —

8 NC —

Pin Signal Description

1 GND Ground

2 19.5V 19.5V

3 DCLK+ Clock+

4 DCLK– Clock–

5 DR+ Receive data+

6 DR– Receive data–

7 FS+ Frame sync+

8 FS– Frame sync–

9 DX+ Transmit data+

10 DX– Transmit data–

11 RX Serial receive data

12 TX Serial transmit data

13 19.5V 19.5V

1 8

1 13

2 14

14 GND Ground

Pin Signal Description

1 Y.GND Brightness signal ground

2 C.GND Chrominance signal ground

3 Y Brightness signal

4 C Chrominance signal

5 COMP.GND

Composite signal ground

6 COMP.GND

Composite signal ground

7 COMP Composite signal

Pin Signal Description

1 Y Brightness signal

2 Y.GND Brightness signal ground

3 Pb Color difference signal (B – Y)

4 Pb.GND Color difference signal (B – Y) ground

5 Pr Color difference signal (R – Y)

6 Pr.GND Color difference signal (R – Y) ground

7 TXD No connection

Pin Signal Description

1

37

4

2

56

15 9

8 1

243Specifications

Page 244: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

The pin assignment above is used to connect the PCSA-CXG80 Camera Unit.

RGB OUT/IN connector

Mini D-sub 15-pin (female)

EC-MIC (A7) 1 and 2 connectors

8 RXD No connection

9 19.5V 19.5 V

10 LVDS-RXD+

Multiplexed receive signal (+)

11 LVDS-RXD–

Multiplexed receive signal (–)

12 SIRCS No connection

13 LVDS-TXD+

Multiplexed transmit signal (+)

14 LVDS-TXD–

Multiplexed transmit signal (–)

15 GND Ground

Pin Signal Description

1 RED R (red)

2 GREEN G (green)

3 BLUE B (blue)

4 NC –

5 GND Ground

6 RED.GND R (red) signal ground

7 GREEN.GND G (green) signal ground

8 BLUE.GND B (blue) signal ground

9 NC –

10 SYNC.GND Sync signal ground

11 NC –

12 NC –

13 HSYNC Horizontal sync

14 VSYNC Vertical sync

15 NC –

Pin Signal Description

15 11

5 1

10 6

Pin Signal Description

1 GND Ground

2 TXD+ Transmit data+

3 TXD– Transmit data–

4 NC –

5 NC –

6 MICDET Microphone detect

7 GND Ground

8 RXD+ Receive data+

9 RXD– Receive data–

10 +12 V Power supply+12 V

1

3

2

9

8

10

244 Specifications

Page 245: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

TERMINAL connector (PCSA-CXG80)

D-sub 15-pin connector (female)

ISDN 1-3 jacks (PCSA-B384S)ISDN 1-6 jacks (PCSA-B768S)

Modular jack

TERMINAL connector (PCSA-B384S/PCSA-B768S)

USB connector

Pin Assignments on Optional Board Connectors

Pin Signal Description

1 Y-OUT Brightness signal

2 Y.GND Brightness signal ground

3 Pb-OUT Color difference signal (B – Y)

4 Pb-GND Color difference signal (B – Y) ground

5 Pr-CAM Color difference signal (R – Y)

6 Pr-GND Color difference signal (R – Y) ground

7 No connection –

8 No Connection

9 +19.5 V +19.5 V

10 LVDS-TXD+ Multiplexed transmit signal (+)

11 LVDS-TXD– Multiplexed transmit signal (-)

12 No connection –

13 LVDX-RXD+ Multiplexed receive signal (+)

14 LVDS-RXD– Multiplexed receive signal (-)

15 GND Ground

15 9

8 1

Pin Signal Description

1 NC –

2 NC –

3 TA Transmit+

4 RA Receive+

5 RB Receive–

6 TB Transmit–

7 NC –

8 NC –

Pin Signal Description

1 GND Chassis ground

2 19.5V 19.5V

3 DCLK+ Clock+

4 DCLK– Clock–

5 DR+ Transmit data+

6 DR– Transmit data–

7 FS+ Frame sync+

8 FS– Frame sync–

9 DX+ Receive data+

10 DX– Receive data–

11 TX Serial transmit data

12 RX Serial receive data

13 19.5V 19.5V

14 GND Ground

1 8

1 13

2 14

245Specifications

Page 246: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

For point-to-point connection

For multipoint connection

The port numbers for RTCP that can be set are 49152 to 65535.

List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-XG80/XG80S

Signal Port number TypeRAS 1719 UDP

Gatekeeper Discovery 224.0.1.41:1718 UDP Multicast

Q.931 (dial) 2253-2263 TCP

Q.931 (answer) 1720 TCP

H.245 2253-2263 TCP

Audio RTP 49152-49159 UDP

Audio RTCP 49152-49159 UDP

Video RTP 49152-49159 UDP

Video RTCP 49152-49159 UDP

FECC RTP 49152-49159 UDP

FECC RTCP 49152-49159 UDP

2nd Video RTP 49152-49159 UDP

2nd Video RTCP 49152-49159 UDP

SIP 5060 UDP/TCP

Auto bandwidth detection 51234-51235 UDP/TCP

Signal Port number of the first point

Port numbers of the second to fifth points

Type

RAS 1719 UDP

Gatekeeper Discovery 224.0.1.41:1718 UDP Multicast

Q.931 (dial) 2253-2263 TCP

Q.931 (answer) 1720 TCP

H.245 2253-2263 TCP

Audio RTP

49152-49159

second point: 49172-49179third point: 49192-49199forth point: 49212-49219fifth point: 49232-49239

UDP

Audio RTCP

Video RTP

Video RTCP

FECC RTP

FECC RTCP

2nd Video RTP

2nd Video RTCP

SIP 5060 UDP/TCP

Auto bandwidth detection

51234-51235 UDP/TCP

Note

246 Specifications

Page 247: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Meeting Room Layout

Be sure to position camera and microphone appropriately in your meeting room.

Camera Range represents the shooting area of the

camera when the zoom has been extended fully. indicates the shooting area of the camera when the angling function is fully utilized. Use the measurements below as a guide for the layout of your meeting room.

Top view (horizontal range at maximum zoom-out)

Lighting ConsiderationsDo not point the camera toward a window where sunlight comes in as back lighting may decrease the contrast. If it is necessary, cover the window with a thick curtain.

Adjust room lighting so that it falls on the participants. Avoid direct light on the TV monitor. Light intensity on faces should be about 300 lux or more.

247Meeting Room Layout

Page 248: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

“Memory Stick” Media

Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or “Memory Stick PRO Duo” for the Visual Communication System.

Notes on using “Memory Stick” media • When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure

prevention switch to “LOCK”, data cannot be recorded, edited, or deleted.

The position and shape of the write-protect switch may differ between the various types of “Memory Stick”.

• Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while it is reading or writing data.

• Data may be damaged if:–The “Memory Stick” is removed or the

unit is turned off while reading or writing.

–You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise.

• We recommend that you back up important data recorded on the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not affix anything other than the supplied label to the “Memory Stick” label area.

• Affix the label so that it does not stick out beyond the label area.

• When storing or carrying a “Memory Stick”, keep it in its original case.

• Do not touch the terminal of the “Memory Stick” with anything, including your fingers or metallic objects.

• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.

• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in locations subject to:

–Extreme heat, such as in a closed car parked in the sun.

–Direct sunlight.–Humidity or corrosive substances.

About data• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure

prevention switch to “LOCK”, data such as images and mails cannot be recorded, edited, or deleted. Be sure to unlock the switch before transferring or copying data on the unit to the “Memory Stick”, or erasing data on the “Memory Stick”.

• We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data on another “Memory Stick” or on a hard disk using a computer.

Notes on using “Memory Stick Duo”• Use a pointed object, such as a ballpoint

pen, to move the “Memory Stick Duo” write-protect switch.

• Do not write forcefully on the “Memory Stick Duo” memo area.

Format that can be used with this unitThe unit can use the picture files recorded on a “Memory Stick” in the following format:• Image files (DCF-compatible)

compressed in the JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format (extension: .jpg)

Terminal

Erasure prevention switch

Label area

Terminal

Write-protect switch

Memo area

248 “Memory Stick” Media

Page 249: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Phenomena Specific to CMOS Image Sensors

The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They do not indicate malfunctions.

White flecksAlthough the CMOS image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.This is related to the principle of CMOS image sensors and is not a malfunction.

The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases:• when operating at a high environmental

temperature• when you have raised the gain (sensitivity)

This phenomenon may be improved when you turn the power of the System off and on.

AliasingWhen fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker.

Memory StickTM, Memory Stick DuoTM, Memory Stick PROTM, Memory Stick PRO DuoTM and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

249Phenomena Specific to CMOS Image Sensors

Page 250: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Glossary

ARCAn abbreviation for Adaptive Rate Control. Technology which automatically lowers a video streaming bitrate against network congestion.

ARQAn abbreviation for Automatic Repeat reQuest. Error control method in which the receiver requests a retransmission from the transmitter when a packet loss occurs.

Auto Bandwidth DetectionDetects the network bandwidth and others before communication. By using this value for the QoS function, optimum QoS control is available from the beginning of the communication.

Bonding*Bonding is one of the Inverse Multiplexing methods allowing the connection of the communication system with multiple ISDN lines. Dialing the first ISDN line enables you to connect all other lines. Dialing the second and later lines is done automatically by the communication between the communication systems on both sites. To use bonding, it is required that both communication systems be equipped with the bonding function and that “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the ISDN Setup menu of the answering site be set correctly. As the communication between the systems when using the bonding function is made via the ISDN numbers of the answering site, the “Area Code” and “Local Number” settings in the ISDN Setup menu are not essential at the dialing site.

* Bonding (Bandwidth on Demand Interoperability Group) is a registered trademark of THE BONDING CONSORTIUM.

BRIAn abbreviation for Basic Rate Interface. Basic interface standardized by the ITU-T. Single ISDN has two B channels and one D channel.

CodecAn abbreviation for Coder-Decoder. An integrated device of a coder that converts an analog audio/video signal to a digital data stream and compresses it, and a decoder for expanding to restore the original analog signal.

DHCPAn abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Manages IP addresses in the network.

DNSAn abbreviation for Domain Name System. Defines the domain name system.

Echo CancellerDevice to eliminate echo that occurs when transmitting audio.

FECAn abbreviation for Forward Error Correction. Error control method in which the receiver can correct errors without requesting a retransmission from the transmitter.

Frame rateThe number of frames which can be encoded/decoded in one second.

G.711Audio encoding/decoding format recommended by the ITU-T. A phone bandwidth audio signal is converted to a digital signal with a data rate of 64 Kbps. It can be transmitted with a data rate of 56 Kbps.

G.722Audio encoding/decoding format recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz bandwidth audio signal is converted to a digital signal with a data rate of 48 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps.

G.728Audio encoding/decoding format recommended by the ITU-T. A phone bandwidth audio signal is converted to a digital signal with a data rate of 16 Kbps.

250 Glossary

Page 251: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

GatekeeperControls the access of H.323 communication devices on a network. Administers the zone, access limitation, audio/video bandwidth, and alias etc.

H.221Frame structure for a digital channel in audiovisual teleservices.

H.239ITU-T standard for sharing data and presentations with video. This supports the dual video presentation mode, enabling endpoints to receive and transmit video and presentation data simultaneously.

H.261Video codec for audio/visual services as p × 64 Kbps. A standard that defines a video coding algorithm, picture format and error correcting technology for communication between different manufacturers’ video codecs.

H.263A video coding algorithm based on the H.261 standard. This format enables communication via a lower bit rate.

H.263+Video encoding/decoding format based on the H.263 standard, added by the Annex I to T (I, J, K …… T), that allows enhanced picture quality and error resistance. Normally, this format is a profile used with a combination of some of the Annex for H.263/H.263+.

H.264A video coding algorithm standardized by the ITU-T in May 2003. This format realizes high-quality picture via a lower bit rate. It provides an equal picture quality via half as low bit rate as the H.263 format. The H.264 format is also called as MPEG4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC).

H.320A standard for communication between different communication systems.

H.323This enables communications on the non-Qos (Quality of Service) LAN.

HDAn abbreviation for High Definition. High Definition television provides a high-resolution and high-quality picture. There are 1080i and 720P HD formats.

HMLPSee “MLP”.

HOPNumber of routers that have passed through to reach the remote party.

I-MUXAn abbreviation for Inverse Multiplexer. This protocol allows you to transmit the data at 384 Kbps via 6B-channel.

ISDNAn abbreviation for Integrated Services Digital Network. This is a communication protocol by CCITT on transmission of integrated voice, video, and data. Bandwidths include basic (64 Kbps) and primary rate (1.544 and 2.048 Mbps).

ITU-TAn abbreviation for International Telecommunication Union, Telecommunications.

Lip synchronizationA function that synchronizes sound with motion. Sound processing is much faster than motion processing, thus sound and motion sometimes get out of step with each other.

MLPData communication is also available during communication of video/audio signals between the communication systems. The MLP or HMLP is a protocol for data communication such as NetMeeting. Using the HMLP protocol allows faster data transmission.

251Glossary

Page 252: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

NTSCAn abbreviation for National TV Standards Committee. NTSC is the television system in use in Japan, the United States, etc.It is not compatible with the PAL system.

PALAn abbreviation for Phase Alternation Line. PAL is the television system in use in Europe, China, etc.It is not compatible with the NTSC system.

P in PAn abbreviation for “Picture in Picture.” This is a function which allows you to monitor your own party on a small window on your TV monitor.

QoSAn abbreviation for Quality of Service. QoS reserves a bandwidth for specific communication in the network and guarantees a given communication speed.

SIPAn acronym for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a communication control protocol used for Internet telephony, instant messaging, etc.

SNMPAn abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol. This protocol is for management information between the management station and the managed terminals. This enables the monitoring of Sony Communication Systems.

SPIDAn abbreviation for Service Profile ID.

StreamingA technology that allows audio and video data to be played back as it is downloaded for real time viewing over a network, such as the Internet.

Sub-addressAn identification number given to devices sharing a common ISDN line.

TOSInputting the information data in the TOS field of the IP address allows the communication system to judge the packet transmission priority, etc. It also enables change of path according to the types of service (Delay or Size).

YPbPrComponent video that is transmitted with three signal cables Y, Pb and Pr.

252 Glossary

Page 253: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Menu ConfigurationThe menus of the HD Visual Communication System are configured as described below.For detailed information, see pages in parentheses. The initial settings of each item are bolded.

Home Camera Adjustments Camera Angle Brightness Auto Adjustment, Manual Adjustment Preset Preset Setting List New Entry Preset Number, Camera Angle, Thumbnails Details Digital Zoom Off, On Backlight On, Off White Balance Auto, Indoor, Outdoor, ONE PUSH Focus Auto, Manual Focus Adjustment BrightFace Off, High, Medium, Low Noise Reduction Off, High, Medium, Low Filter Tools Presentation Execute, Stop Streaming Execute, Stop Recording Execute, Stop Annotation Execute Background Screen, Stop Annotation Mode, Start Icon Display On, Off

Reject Answer On, Off

Screen Capture Execute

Machine Status Machine Information Peripheral Status Communication Mode Status LAN Line Status Network Routing Check Setup Line I/F A Dial B Answer C Multipoint D Communication E Audio F Video G LAN H QoS I TOS J SIP K

Continued on next page Continued on next page

(page 47) (page 134)

(page 149) (page 152)

(page 155)

(page 157)

(page 159)

(page 60)

(page 91)

(page 147)

253Menu Configuration

Page 254: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

ISDN L Annotation M Camera N General O Home Menu P Administrator Q Encryption R Shared Phone Book S History Dial, Answer, Missed Call Phone Book “Phone Book” Detailed Dial “Detailed Dial”

Phone Book/ Phone Book List Private Phone New Entry Index, Group Select, Dial to:, Auto Dial, Image, Book One-Touch Dial Specified, Line I/F, Communication Bit Rate, Number of Lines, More Options “More Options” Group Edit History “History” Detailed Dial “Detailed Dial”

One-Touch Dial F1, F2, F3, F4

Direct Dial Line interface IP, IP(2), ISDN, TEL, SIP IP address, Telephone number Dial

Connect Enter Number/Address “Detailed Dial” Select from Phone Book “Phone Book” Select from History “History”

Detailed Dial Detailed Dial Dial to:, Line I/F, Communication Bit Rate, Number of Lines Phone Book “Phone Book” History “History” More Options Enable “List Edit”

(page 108)

(page 120)

(page 107)

(page 114)

(page 111)

(page 110)

A Line I/F Line Interface IP, ISDN, SIP Primary Line Interface IP, ISDN, SIP

Use LAN2 Off, On

(page 64)

254 Menu Configuration

Page 255: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

B Dial Telephone Mode Auto, G.711 -law, G711A-law More Options Enable Off, On User Name Input Off, OnPrefix Prefix-None, Prefix-A, Prefix-B, Prefix-CPrefix-APrefix-BPrefix-CSelect LAN Prefix Disable, EnableLAN Prefix

(page 64)

C Answer Auto Answer On, Off ISDN MSN Off, On Mic on Answer On, OffReject Answer On, Off

(page 65)

D Multipoint Mlutipoint Mode AUTO, On

Broadcast Mode Split, Voice Activate, Voice Activate (720P)

Split Automatic, Six-screen Mosaic

(page 65)

255Menu Configuration

Page 256: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

E Communication IP Individual Settings for Off, On(Communication) Transmission/Reception Individual Settings for Off, On Point-to-Point/Multipoint

IP:Mode Total Bandwidth 128Kbps, 384Kbps, (Communication)4) 512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps, Other Communication Bit Rate1) 128Kbps, 384Kbps, 512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps, Other Audio Mode1) G.711, G.722, G.728, MPEG4 Far End Camera Control2) On, Off H.239 On, Off H.239 Ratio 2/3, 1/2, 1/3 Screen Size1) 720, W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF, AUTO Video Mode1) H.261, H.263+, H.264 Video Frame1) 15fps, 30fps, 60fps, AUTO

ISDN Individual Settings for Off, On Point-to-Point/Multipoint

ISDN:Mode ISDN Bandwidth (Dial)3) 1B(64K), 2B(128K), (Communication)4) 3B(192K), 4B(256K), 5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K)

ISDN Bandwidth 1B(64K), 2B(128K), (Answer)3) 3B(192K), 4B(256K), 5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K) Audio Mode3) G.711, G.722, G.728, MPEG4 Far End Camera Control3) On, Off H.239 On, Off H.239 Ratio 2/3, 1/2, 1/3 Restrict Auto, 56K Screen Size3) W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, AUTO Video Mode3) H.261, H.263+, H.264 Video Frame3) 15fps, 30fps, AUTO

Continued on next page

(page 66)

256 Menu Configuration

Page 257: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

SIP:Mode Communication Bit Rate 128Kbps, 384Kbps, (Communication)4) 512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps, 4Mbps, 5Mbps, 6Mbps, 7Mbps, 8Mbps, 9Mbps, 10Mbps, Other Audio Mode G.728, G.722, G.711 Far End Camera Control On, Off Screen Size 720, W4CIF, W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF, AUTO Video Mode H.261, H.263+, H.264, MPEG4 Video Frame 15fps, 30fps, 60fps, AUTO

1) When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” is set to “On” on the IP page, the item is set up for transmission, reception, point-to-point and multipoint individually.

2) When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” is set to “On” on the IP page, the item is set up for point-to-point and multipoint individually.

3) When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” is set to “On” on the ISDN page, the item is set up for point-to-point and multipoint individually.

4) The page number after “Communication2” varies with the on/off setting in “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint”.

257Menu Configuration

Page 258: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

F Audio Basic Setup1 Audio Input MIC, AUX, MIC+AUX(Audio1) Input Select (MIC)/ MIC(A1/A3), EC-MIC(A7), Input Select (AUX) AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2 Echo Canceller On, Off Lip Sync Auto, Off Recording Mute Off, On Input Mode Stereo, Monaural Output Mode Stereo, Monaural

Basic Setup2 AUX Local Monitor Out On, Off(Audio2) Reversed MIC Inputs Off, On Audio Input Delay Setting Default–100ms, Default–50ms, Default, Default+50ms, Default+100ms, Custom Audio Input Delay Audio Output Delay Setting Default–100ms, Default–50ms, Default, Default+50ms, Default+100ms, Custom Audio Output Delay REC OUT Mode Stereo, Monaural 2ch

Sound Effect Beep Sound Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off(Audio3) Sound Effect Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off Dial Tone Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off Ringer Tone Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off

(page 69)

G Video Basic Setup Video Input Camera, RGB, YPbPr, S VIDEO (Video1) Presentation Screen Full Screen, PandP, Side by Side Monitor Output HDMI, RGB, HDMI+RGB RGB Monitor Output Format SXGA, XGA, WXGA Blanking Period Long, Medium, Short Frequency 60Hz, 50Hz

Custom Input Custom Input Label (Camera) Label Custom Input Label (RGB) (Video2) Custom Input Label (YPbPr) Custom Input Label (S VIDEO) Link to Mic Link to Audio Input Off, On (Video3) Video Input Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB, YPbPr Audio Input MIC, AUX, MIC+AUX Input Select (MIC) MIC(A1/A3), EC-MIC(A7) Input Select (AUX) AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2

(page 72)

258 Menu Configuration

Page 259: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

1) When “Use LAN2” is set to “On” in the Line I/F setup menu, the Basic Setup pages for LAN1 and LAN2 are displayed, and you can set up the items on those pages.

H LAN Basic Setup1) Host Name (LAN) DHCP Mode Auto, Off Prefix Length IP Address Network Mask Gateway Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS LAN Mode Auto, 100Mbps Full Duplex, 100Mbps Half Duplex, 10Mbps Full Duplex, 10Mbps Half Duplex

PPPoE PPPoE Off, LAN1, LAN2 (LAN) User Alias

Password Fixed IP for PPPoE Off, On Fixed IP Address for PPPoE DNS Obtain automatically, Specify Primary DNS Secondary DNS

NAT Setup NAT Mode Auto, On, Off(LAN) WAN IP Address

Gatekeeper Gatekeeper Mode Auto, On, Off(LAN) Gatekeeper Address User Alias User Number

Used Port Q.931 Number, H.245

RTP/RTCP Setup RTP/RTCP(LAN) MTU Size SNMP SNMP Mode On, Off(LAN) Trap Destination Community Description Location Contact

(page 74)

259Menu Configuration

Page 260: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

I QoS Basic Setup Adaptive Rate Control (ARC) On, Off(QoS1) Auto Bandwidth Detection On, Off TCP Port Number UDP Port Number Packet Resend Request(ARQ) On, Off ARQ Buffering Time 300ms, 150ms, 80ms, Auto, Custom ARQ Buffering Time Forward Error Correction(FEC) On, Off FEC Redundancy 8, 4, 2, Auto Audio Duplex Transmission On, Off

Re-Order/Shaping Re-Order On, Off(QoS2) Re-Order Buffer Auto, 1, 2, Custom Re-Order Buffer Rate Shaping On, Off

(page 76)

J TOS TOS Data Type Video, Audio, Data, Presentation TOS Off, IP Precedence, DSCP Precedence Low Delay On, Off High Throughput On, Off High Reliability On, Off Minimum Cost On, Off DSCP

(page 77)

K SIP Basic Setup SIP Server Mode On, Off (SIP) Transport Protocol TCP, UDP Port Number SIP Domain Registered User Name Password SIP Server Address SIP Server Port

(page 78)

260 Menu Configuration

Page 261: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

L ISDN Basic Setup Country/Region Country/region selectable (ISDN1) Protocol Japan(NTT), National ISDN, Euro ISDN, Euro ISDN(France), 5ESS(P-MP), 5ESS(P-P), DMS-100

Telephone Number Area Code (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2) (ISDN2) Local Number (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2)

Telephone Number Area Code (D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2) (ISDN3) Local Number (D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2) Sub Address Sub Address (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2) (ISDN4)

SPID SPID (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2, Auto SPID) (ISDN5)

(page 79)

M Annotation Enable On, OffColor Black, Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange, Purple, WhiteLine Density Thick, Medium, Thin

(page 80)

N Camera Fade In On, Off Second Camera Input RGB, YPbPr, S-VIDEO(page 81)

261Menu Configuration

Page 262: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

O General Device Setup Terminal Name (General1) Standby Mode On, Off Standby Time 1-99 minutes Last Number Registration Off, On Control by Far End On, Off Language Japanese, English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic, Thai, Norwegian, Turkish, Welsh, Czech, Hungarian System LED Brightness Bright, Off, Dark Camera LED Brightness Bright, Off, Dark RF Remote Control System, Camera Reception

Clock Set NTP On, Off (General2) Primary NTP Server Secondary NTP Server Time Zone Clock Display Pattern Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year-Month-Day, Day.Month.Year Date Time Time Update Execute

Menu Screens Display Time in Off, Time Display, Current Time (General3) Communication Display Terminal Name Off, Always Show, Show Temporarily Guide On, Off Display Indicator On, Off Communication Mode On, Off Display Display On-Screen On, Off Keyboard Menu Transparency High, Medium, Low

Continued on next page

(page 81)

262 Menu Configuration

Page 263: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Function Keys F1 Far/Near, Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB, YPbPr, in Communication No Operation(General4) F2 Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB, YPbPr, No Operation F3 Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB, YPbPr, Zoom (RGB), No Operation F4 Camera, S-VIDEO, RGB, YPbPr, No Operation

P Home Menu Home Menu1 Clock Display On, Off(Home Menu1) Local Terminal Name On, Off Number Display IP:Address, SIP:User Name, SIP:Address, GK:User Alias, GK:User Number, NAT:Address, No Display Terminal Status On, Off Warning Messages On, Off

Home Menu2 Connect Button Display Simple, Individual, Off (Home Menu2) Phone Book Button On, Off History Button On, Off Detailed Dial Button On, Off Camera Button On, Off Tools Button Off, On One-Touch Dial On, Off Direct Dial Off, On

Home Menu3 Video Input Display On, Off(Home Menu3) Audio Input Display On, Off Audio Level Meter On, Off Volume On, Off LAN Status On, Off ISDN Status On, Off

(page 83)

263Menu Configuration

Page 264: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Q Administrator Password Administrator Password (Administrator1) Phone Book Modification Password Save Settings Password

Remote Access Password Streaming Broadcast Password

Setup Password1 Line I/F Enabled, Disabled (Administrator2) Dial Enabled, Disabled Answer Enabled, Disabled Multipoint Enabled, Disabled IP Mode Enabled, Disabled SIP Mode Enabled, Disabled ISDN Mode Enabled, Disabled

Setup Password2 Audio Enabled, Disabled (Administrator3) Video Enabled, Disabled LAN Enabled, Disabled QoS Enabled, Disabled TOS Enabled, Disabled SIP Enabled, Disabled ISDN Enabled, Disabled Setup Password3 General Enabled, Disabled (Administrator4) Home Menu Enabled, Disabled Administrator Enabled, Disabled Annotation Enabled, Disabled Camera Enabled, Disabled Encryption Enabled, Disabled Shared Phone Book Enabled, Disabled

Streaming/Recording Streaming Enabled, Disabled (Administrator5) Recording Enabled, Disabled Video Off, 64Kbps, 128Kbps, 384Kbps, 512Kbps Multicast Address Audio Port Number Video Port Number HOP

Access Permit1) Web Monitor On, Off (Administrator6) Web Access Enabled, Disabled Telnet Access Enabled, Disabled SSH Access Enabled, Disabled Image Flip for First Camera Flip Vertical, Off Image Flip for Second Camera Flip Vertical, Off

Continued on next page

(page 85)

1) The items on the Access Permit page are displayed and can be set only when “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4”.

264 Menu Configuration

Page 265: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Appendix

Other Use History On, Off (Administrator7) Save Setup Execute Load Setup Execute AMX Device Discovery Off, On HOP 1080i Mode Off, On Auto Restore On, Off Internet Protocol IPv4, IPv6

Phone Book Save Phone Book Execute (Administrator8) Load Phone Book Execute Clear Phone Book Execute Auto Dialing On, Off Create Private Phone Book Execute Delete Private Phone Book Execute Copy to Private Phone Book Execute

R Encryption Encryption Mode Off, Connect Priority, Encrypt Priority(page 89)

S Shared Phone Book SPB Mode On, Off SPB Server Address SPB Server Password

(page 90)

265Menu Configuration

Page 266: HD Visual Communication System - pro.sony · Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите сьответстващи

Sony Corporation